Casio WK-7600 USER MANUAL

CTK7200_e_Cover1-4.
fm 1 ページ２０１４年３月７日　金曜日　午後３時１６分
CTK- 7200 E
WK-7600
USER’S GUIDE
Please keep all information for future reference.
This recycle mark indicates that the packaging conforms to
the environmental protection legislation in Germany. Safety Precautions
Before trying to use the keyboard, be sure to read the
separate “Safety Precautions”.
K MA1403-B Printed in China

CTK7200/WK7600E1B
CTK7200/WK7600E1B
CTK7200_e_Cover1-4.fm 2 ページ２０１４年３月７日　金曜日　午後３時１６分
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Version : 1.0
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
O : Yes
X : No
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Data entry LSB, MSB

Remarks
FCC WARNING
NRPN LSB, MSB

RPN LSB, MSB
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Chorus send
Reverb send
Bank select
Expression
Modulation
Soft pedal
Sostenuto
Volume
Hold 1
Pan
Declaration of Conformity
*2: For details, see MIDI Implementation at http://world.casio.com/.

Model Number: CTK-7200/WK-7600
Trade Name: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
O (MSB only)
Responsible party: CASIO AMERICA, INC.
X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =**

Address: 570 MT. PLEASANT AVENUE, DOVER, NEW JERSEY 07801
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
Telephone number: 973-361-5400
Recognized
0 - 127 *1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
O 0 - 127
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *2
Mode 3
0 - 127
1 - 16
1 - 16
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
interference that may cause undesired operation.
*3: In accordance with pedal effect setting.
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
Transmitted
*1: Depends on tone.

X 9nH v = 0
O 0 - 127
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *3
O *3
O *3
O *2
O *2
O *2
Mode 3
0 - 127
1 - 16
1 - 16
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
0, 32
1
6, 38
7
10
11
16 - 19
64
66
67
70 - 90
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
: Reset all controller

: Local ON/OFF
: Commands
: All notes OFF

Models: CTK-7200/WK-7600
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Messages
: Active Sense
True voice
Note OFF
: All sound off
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

: Song Pos
Changed
: Song Sel
Note ON
Altered
Default
Default
:True #
Key’s
: Clock
Ch’s
: Tune
: Reset
Function
System Exclusive
Pitch Bender
Messages
Real Time
Common
Remarks
Program
Channel
Velocity
Number
Change
Change
System
System
Control
Touch
Basic
Mode
After
Note
Aux
CTK7200_e. oo ページ２０１４年３月７日　金曜日　午後３時４分
Important!
Please note the following important information before using this product.
• Before using the optional AC Adaptor to power the unit, be sure to check the AC Adaptor for any damage first. Carefully check
the power cord for breakage, cuts, exposed wire and other serious damage. Never let children use an AC adaptor that is
seriously damaged.
• Never attempt to recharge batteries.
• Do not use rechargeable batteries.
• Never mix old batteries with new ones.
• Use recommended batteries or equivalent types.
• Always make sure that positive (+) and negative (–) poles are facing correctly as indicated near the battery compartment.
• Replace batteries as soon as possible after any sign they are getting weak.
• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.
• The product is not intended for children under 3 years.
• Use only a CASIO AD-A12150LW adaptor.
• The AC adaptor is not a toy.
• Be sure to disconnect the AC adaptor before cleaning the product.
This mark applies in EU countries only.
Manufacturer:
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
Responsible within the European Union:
CASIO EUROPE GmbH
Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany
● Any reproduction of the contents of this manual, either in part or its entirety, is prohibited. Except for your own, personal
use, any other use of the contents of this manual without the consent of CASIO is prohibited under copyright laws.
● IN NO EVENT SHALL CASIO BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT, EVEN IF CASIO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
● The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
● The actual appearance of the product may be different from that shown in the illustrations in this User’s Guide.
● Company and product names used in this manual may be registered trademarks of others.
E-1
CTK7200_e. oo 2 ページ２０１４年３月７日　金曜日　午後３時４分
Contents
General Guide ............................. E-4 Applying Effects to a Sound .... E-29
Reading the Display ............................................... E-6 Configuration of Effects ........................................ E-29
Modes..................................................................... E-7 Selecting an Effect................................................ E-31
Menus..................................................................... E-7 Creating a User DSP ............................................ E-33
, Precautions while “Please Wait” is displayed.... E-7
Saving Settings....................................................... E-8 Using the Mixer ......................... E-36
Returning the Digital Keyboard to Its
Mixer Overview..................................................... E-36
Factory Default Settings ......................................... E-8
Mixer Operation .................................................... E-37
Mixer Parameter Settings ..................................... E-41
Getting Ready to Play ................ E-9
Preparing the Music Stand ..................................... E-9 Using the Tone Editor............... E-44
Power Supply ......................................................... E-9
Tone Creation Overview....................................... E-44
Creating a User Tone ........................................... E-46
Connections .............................. E-11 Tone Parameter Settings...................................... E-48
Connecting Headphones ...................................... E-11
Connecting a Pedal .............................................. E-11 Using Drawbar Organ Tones ... E-50
Outputting Digital Keyboard Sound to
Audio Equipment or an Amplifier .......................... E-11 Playing with a Drawbar Organ Tone..................... E-50
Outputting Input from an External Device or a Editing Drawbar Organ Tones .............................. E-52
Microphone through the Digital Keyboard’s
Speakers .............................................................. E-12 Music Presets............................ E-54
Bundled and Optional Accessories....................... E-12
Using Music Presets............................................. E-54
Creating a User Preset ......................................... E-58
Selecting and Editing a Chord Progression................................. E-62
Playing a Tone .......................... E-13
To turn on Digital Keyboard power ....................... E-13 Saving Keyboard Setups to
Listening to Demo Tunes...................................... E-14 Registration Memory ................ E-66
Selecting a Tone................................................... E-14
To save a setup to registration memory ............... E-67
Layering and Splitting Tones ................................ E-15
To recall a setup from registration memory .......... E-67
Raising and Lowering Keyboard Tuning
(Transpose) .......................................................... E-18
Using Octave Shift................................................ E-18 Using the Song Sequencer ...... E-68
Using the Metronome ........................................... E-19 Starting One-touch Recording (EASY REC) ........ E-68
Using the Pitch Bend Wheel................................. E-20 What you can do with the song sequencer........... E-70
Applying Vibrato to Notes ..................................... E-20 Recording Individual Tracks ................................. E-72
Selecting a Temperament and Re-recording Part of a Song
Fine Tuning Its Scale............................................ E-21 (Punch-in Recording)............................................ E-76
Playing Arpeggio Phrases Automatically Using Panel Record to Rewrite Song
(Arpeggiator)......................................................... E-23 Header Settings.................................................... E-78
Playing a Recorded Song..................................... E-79
Using Auto Accompaniment ... E-24 Editing a Song ...................................................... E-81
Editing a Track...................................................... E-85
Playing an Auto Accompaniment.......................... E-24
Editing Events....................................................... E-87
Selecting a Chord Fingering Mode ....................... E-26
Directly Inputting Note Events (Step Input) ........ E-100
Modifying Auto Accompaniment Patterns............. E-27
Using One-Touch Presets .................................... E-27
Using Auto Harmonize.......................................... E-28
E-2
Contents
Using the Reference................................. E-148

Pattern Sequencer .................. E-102 Error Messages .................................................. E-148
Troubleshooting.................................................. E-150
About the Pattern Sequencer ............................. E-102
Specifications ..................................................... E-152
Creating a User Rhythm ..................................... E-103
Operating Precautions........................................ E-154
Creating a User Rhythm by Combining
Exiting Rhythm Parts (Easy Edit) ....................... E-112 DSP Effect List ................................................... E-155
Editing Individual Events (Event Editor) ............. E-113 Fingering Guide .................................................. E-160
Configuring Instrument Part Playback Supported Input Characters ............................... E-160
Settings (Part Parameters) ................................. E-116 Assigning a MIDI Channel to Each Part ............. E-161
Instrument Part Operations ................................ E-118 Parameter List .................................................... E-162
Accompaniment Pattern and Chord Example List ............................................ E-163
Rhythm Operations............................................. E-120
MIDI Implementation Chart
Recording and
Playing Audio.......................... E-121
Audio Recording and Playback Functions.......... E-121
Audio Recording and Playback Precautions ...... E-121
Performing Audio Recording .............................. E-122
Playing Back Audio............................................. E-126
Using the Function Menu....... E-130

Using the Function Menu.................................... E-130
Function Menu Settings...................................... E-131
Using a Memory Card............. E-136

Loading and Removing a Memory Card............. E-137
Entering the Card Mode ..................................... E-137
Formatting a Memory Card................................. E-137
Saving Digital Keyboard Data to a
Memory Card...................................................... E-138
Loading Data from a Memory Card .................... E-140
To delete a file from a memory card................... E-141
To rename a file on a memory card.................... E-141
Playing a Music File from a Memory Card.......... E-142
Connecting to a Computer .... E-145

Minimum Computer System Requirements........ E-145
Storing and Loading Digital Keyboard
Memory Data ...................................................... E-146
Using Rhythm (Auto Accompaniment) Data
from another Model ............................................ E-146
Importing Data from Various Storage Media ...... E-147
E-3
General Guide
• Illustrations in this User’s Guide show the WK-7600.
• There is a button number reference at the back of this manual. You can tear it out and refer to the button numbers as
required.
L-1 - L-17 C-1 - C-17
Dial
S-2
S-1
D-1 - D-12 R-1 - R-20
T-1 - T-10
Back
E-4
General Guide
• In this manual, the term “Digital Keyboard” refers to the CTK-7200/WK-7600.

• This manual uses the numbers and names below to refer to buttons and controllers.
• The following explains the meanings of the # and $ symbols that appear on the product console and with the key names below.
# : Indicates a function that is enabled by holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button when pressing a button. For example, SONG SEQUENCER, #
EDIT means that the EDIT function is enabled by depressing the R-13 (FUNCTION) button.
$ : Indicates a function that is enabled by holding down the button for some time. For example, METRONOME, BEAT $ means that the BEAT function is
enabled by holding down the button for some time.
L-1 POWER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞13 TONE buttons

L-2 VOLUME knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞13
R-1 [A] PIANO, 5 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94
RHYTHM buttons R-2 [B] E.PIANO, 1 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94
R-3 [C] ORGAN, 2 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95
L-3 [A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 24
R-4 [D] GUITAR/BASS, • button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94
L-4 [B] JAZZ/EUROPEAN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24
R-5 [E] STRINGS, REST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 100
L-5 [C] LATIN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24
R-6 [F] BRASS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95
L-6 [D] WORLD/VARIOUS,
MUSIC PRESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24, 54 R-7 [G] REED/PIPE, 6 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95
L-7 [E] PIANO RHYTHMS, R-8 [H] SYNTH, 7 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 63, 94, 95
ONE TOUCH PRESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24, 27, 54 R-9 [I] OTHERS, 8 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 94, 95
L-8 [F] USER RHYTHMS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞24, 27 R-10 [J] GM/DRUMS, , button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 94, 95
R-11 [K] USER TONES, . button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 46
L-9 METRONOME, $BEAT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞19
R-12 [L] DRAWBAR ORGAN, $MANUAL button . . . . . . . . . ☞50
L-10 TEMPO w button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞19
L-11 TEMPO q, #TAP button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞19 R-13 FUNCTION button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞130
R-14 NO/–, YES/+, #TRANSPOSE buttons . . . . . . . ☞6, 14, 18, 24
RHYTHM/SONG CONTROLLER buttons
R-15 EXIT button
L-12 INTRO, REPEAT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞27, 80, 142 R-16 ENTER button
L-13 NORMAL/FILL-IN, sREW button . . . . . . . ☞14, 27, 79, 142 R-17 u, t, y, i buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7
L-14 VARIATION/FILL-IN, dFF button . . . . . . . ☞14, 27, 79, 142 R-18 AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR,
L-15 SYNCHRO/ENDING, PAUSE button . . . . . . ☞24, 27, 79, 142 $TYPE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞23, 28
L-16 START/STOP, PLAY/STOP, R-19 SPLIT button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞16
DEMO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 24, 79, 142 R-20 LAYER, $OCTAVE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞16, 18
L-17 ACCOMP ON/OFF, $CHORDS, D-1 ROTARY SLOW/FAST, PART/COMMON button . . . . . . . . . ☞51
PART SELECT, DEMO button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞14, 24, 26, 143 D-2 PERCUSSION SECOND, GROUP A/B button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞6 D-3 PERCUSSION THIRD, 1-8/9-16 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-2 AUDIO RECORD button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞123 D-4 16', 1/9/EXT slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-3 RECORD button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞68, 72, 73 D-5 5 1/3', 2/10/DSP slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-4 SONG SEQUENCER, #EDIT button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7, 72, 81 D-6 8', 3/11 slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-5 PATTERN SEQUENCER, #EDIT button . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞102 D-7 4', 4/12 slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-6 AUDIO PLAY button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞126 D-8 2 2/3', 5/13 slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-7 MIXER, #EFFECT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞31, 37 D-9 2', 6/14 slider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-8 TONE EDITOR, #SCALE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞21, 46 D-10 1 3/5', 7/15 slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
C-9 CARD, #LOAD/SAVE button . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7, 137, 138, 140 D-11 1 1/3', 8/16 slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞6, 14, 24 D-12 1', MASTER slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞51
S-1 PITCH BEND wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞20
REGISTRATION buttons
S-2 MODULATION button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞20
C-10 BANK, DELETE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞63, 66, 92, 99 T-1 SD CARD SLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞136
C-11 1, INSERT button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞63, 66, 94, 100 T-2 USB jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞145
C-12 2, COPY button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66, 94 T-3 SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞11
C-13 3, QUANTIZE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66, 95 T-4 INST IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12
C-14 4, STEP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞64, 66, 100 T-5 AUDIO IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12
C-15 5 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66 T-6 MIC IN jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12
C-16 6 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞66 T-7 MIC VOLUME knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞12
C-17 STORE, #MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞7, 66 T-8 LINE OUT R, L/MONO jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞11
T-9 PHONES jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞11
T-10 DC 12V jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞9
E-5
General Guide
6 Tempo, measure, beat area

Reading the Display Tempo is shown as the current setting value, as beats per
This section explains the contents of the Digital Keyboard’s minute. Auto Accompaniment, the metronome (page
E-19), and other playback is performed at the tempo
display screen.
shown here. The MEASURE and BEAT values are
counted up as Auto Accompaniment, the metronome, or
1 2 other playback progresses.
Currently Selected Item Indication

The item that is currently selected on a display screen is
indicated by thick brackets (%) and by a large dot (0). The
currently selected item is the one that is affected by the R-14
(–, +) buttons or dial operations.
4 5 6
3
1 Detailed information area
This area displays a variety of information while the Digital
Keyboard is being used. Use this area to confirm proper
operation when changing values, when selecting a menu
item, and when performing other operations.
2 Level meter area On this screen, “RHYTHM” is selected because it is enclosed
This level meter shows the volume level of the notes that by thick brackets. This indicates that the rhythm setting can be
are sounded when you play something on the keyboard or changed.
when Auto Accompaniment is played. There are a total of
32 parts, 16 each in Group A and Group B. The L
indicator will be displayed in the lower left corner while
Group A parts are being indicated by the level meter, while
the M indicator will be displayed in the lower left corner
while Group B parts are being indicated.
For details about parts, see “How Parts are Organized”
(page E-36).
3 Indicator areas
The indicator area shows such information as the current
mode (page E-7), the status of settings, the status of Auto
On this screen, “Touch” is selected because the 0 is next to
Accompaniment, and other information.
it. This indicates that the value to the right of “Touch”, which is
There are two types of indicators: text type indicators such
enclosed in thick brackets, can be changed.
as :, and pointer (K) type indicators. In the case of
pointer type indicators, a setting or status is indicated by
the location of the K next to fixed text along the sides of the
display. For example, the location of the pointer (K) on the
right side of the display in the sample below indicates
REVERB.
4 Registration bank area

This area shows the number of the currently selected
registration bank (page E-66).
5 Chord area
This area shows the chord being played when Auto
Accompaniment (page E-24) or music preset (page E-54)
is being used. It also can display fraction chords by
showing the chord root (C, G, etc.) and type (m, 7th, etc.).
E-6 B
General Guide
Modes Menus
Your Digital Keyboard has three modes: a rhythm mode, a You can use the same operations to display mode and
card mode, and a song sequencer mode. The currently function specific menus. To display a menu, hold down the
selected mode is shown as an indicator on the display. R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the C-17 (MENU)
button. For example, the “Performance” menu shown below
will appear if you perform the above operation while in the
Card mode rhythm mode. This menu provides instant access to
performance functions.
C-9 (CARD) or
R-15 (EXIT) button C-9 (CARD) button
Rhythm mode
C-4 (SONG C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) or

SEQUENCER) button R-15 (EXIT) button
Song sequencer mode

• The currently selected item is the one with the 0 next to it.
You can use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 up
• Rhythm mode (: indicator displayed) and down. You also can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to
Under its initial factory default settings, the Digital Keyboard scroll between menu pages.
enters the rhythm mode whenever it is turned on. The • To exit a displayed menu, press the R-15 (EXIT) button.
rhythm mode is the base mode, and it is the mode you You may need to press the R-15 (EXIT) button more than
should enter when you want to play on the keyboard or use once in some cases.
Auto Accompaniment. • The menu items and operations for specific modes and
• Card mode (; indicator displayed) functions are described in each section of this user’s guide.
Enter the card mode when you want to perform memory
card operations. See “Using a Memory Card” (page E-136)
for more information. , Precautions while “Please
– In the rhythm mode, pressing the C-9 (CARD) button will Wait” is displayed
enter the card mode.
– In the card mode, pressing the C-9 (CARD) button or the Never try to perform any operation, or insert or remove a
R-15 (EXIT) button will return to the rhythm mode. memory card while the message “Please Wait” is on the
• Song sequencer mode (< indicator displayed) display. Wait until the message disappears.
Enter the sequencer mode when you want to record • “Please Wait” indicates that the Digital Keyboard is
performances using the keyboard and Auto performing a data save operation. Turning off the Digital
Accompaniment, or to play back song data. For details, see Keyboard or removing the memory card can cause Digital
“Using the Song Sequencer” (page E-68). Keyboard data to be deleted or become corrupted. It also
– In the rhythm mode, pressing the C-4 (SONG can cause the Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the
SEQUENCER) button will enter the song sequencer L-1 (POWER) button is pressed.
mode. • If this happens, refer to “Troubleshooting” (page E-150).
– In the song sequencer mode, pressing the C-4 (SONG
SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT) button will
return to the rhythm mode.
• After entering any mode besides the rhythm mode and

performing the operations you want, be sure to return
to the rhythm mode.
• Unless otherwise specifically noted, all of the
operations described in this user’s guide are
performed in the rhythm mode.
B
E-7
General Guide
Saving Settings
Your Digital Keyboard is equipped with a song sequencer and
other features that you can use to store data you create. This
stored data is retained even when the Digital Keyboard is
turned off.*
However, the tone, rhythm, and other settings you configure
on the Digital Keyboard’s console normally are returned to
their initial power on defaults whenever you turn off power.
You can configure the Digital Keyboard so it remembers its
latest setup or to apply a predetermined default setup each
time you turn it on. For details, see “AutoResume (Auto
Resume)” (page E-134) and “Default (Default Settings)” (page
E-134).
* The following data and settings are always retained even
when power is turned off.
– Registration setup data (page E-66)
– Song sequencer data (page E-68)
– User rhythm data (page E-103)
– User preset data (page E-58)
– User tone data (page E-44)
– User drawbar organ tone data (page E-50)
– User DSP data (page E-33)
– LCD Contrast setting (page E-133)
– Auto Resume setting (page E-134)
Returning the Digital Keyboard to

Its Factory Default Settings
You can delete all data in keyboard memory and return all
keyboard parameters to their initial factory default settings.
For details, see “To initialize all data and settings (or
parameter settings only)” (page E-135).
E-8
Getting Ready to Play

Preparing the Music Stand Using a Household Power Outlet
Make sure that you use only the AC adaptor (JEITA Standard,
with unified polarity plug) specified for this product. Use of a
Music stand different type of AC adaptor can cause malfunction.
Specified AC Adaptor: AD-A12150LW

Use the supplied power cord to connect the AC adaptor as
shown in the illustration below.
T-10 (DC 12V) jack Household power outlet
Power Supply
Prepare a household power outlet or batteries.
Power cord
• Be sure to comply with the separate “Safety

Precautions”. Incorrect use of this product creates the
risk of electric shock and fire. AC adaptor
• Configuration and type depends on your
• Always make sure that the product is turned off before geographic location.
plugging in or unplugging the AC adaptor, or before
loading or removing batteries.
• The shape of the power cord plug and household

power outlet receptacle differ according to country and
geographical area. The illustration shows just one
example of the shapes that are available.
• The AC adaptor will become warm to the touch after
very long use. This is normal and does not indicate
malfunction.
• To prevent breaking of the wire, take care to avoid
putting any type of load on the power cord.
No bending! No winding!
• Never insert metal, pencils, or any other objects into

the product’s DC 12V jack. Doing so creates the risk of
accident.
E-9
Getting Ready to Play
Using Batteries ■ Low Battery Indication

The following shows the approximate battery life.
You can use six D-size batteries for power. 4 hours* on alkaline batteries
• Use alkaline or zinc-carbon batteries.
* The above values are standard battery life at normal
Never use oxyride or any other nickel based batteries.
temperature, with the volume at medium setting.
1. Open the battery cover on the bottom of the Temperature extremes or playing at very loud volume
settings can shorten battery life.
Digital Keyboard.
The indicators shown below start to flash to let you know
when battery power is low. Replace the batteries with new
ones.
2. Load six D-size batteries into the battery

compartment.
• Make sure the positive + and negative - ends of the
batteries are facing as shown in the illustration.
Low battery indication (flashing)
3. Insert the tabs of the battery cover into the

holes on the side of the battery compartment,
and close the cover.
Tabs
E-10
Connections
Connecting Headphones Outputting Digital Keyboard
Using headphones cuts off output from the built-in speakers, Sound to Audio Equipment or an
which means you can practice playing even late at night
without disturbing others.
Amplifier
• Be sure to turn down the volume level before connecting You can connect audio equipment or a music amplifier to the
headphones. Digital Keyboard and then play through external speakers for
more powerful volume and better sound quality.
• Whenever connecting a device to the Digital Keyboard,

first use the L-2 (VOLUME) knob to set the volume to a
T-9 (PHONES) jack low level. After connecting, you can adjust the volume
to the level you want.
• Whenever you connect any device to the Digital
Keyboard, be sure to read the user documentation that
• Headphones do not come with the Digital Keyboard. comes with the device.
• Use commercially available headphones. Guitar amplifier
Keyboard amplifier, etc.
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
• Do not listen to very high volume output over Standard plug
headphones for long periods. Doing so creates the risk
of hearing damage. Audio amplifier AUX IN jack, etc.
• If you are using headphones that require an adaptor
LEFT (White)
plug, make sure you do not leave the adaptor plugged
RIGHT (Red)
in when removing the headphones.
Pin plug
Connecting a Pedal
Outputting Keyboard Notes to Audio
Connecting an optionally available pedal let’s you perform Equipment 1
pedal operations that add more versatility to your keyboard
play. For information about the types of effects that can be Use commercially available connecting cords to connect the
applied by pressing the pedal, see “Ped.Setting (Pedal external audio equipment to the Digital Keyboard’s T-8 (LINE
Setting)” (page E-131). OUT) jacks as shown in Figure 1. LINE OUT R jack output is
right channel sound, while LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is
left channel sound. It is up to you to purchase connecting
cords like the ones shown in the illustration for connection of
audio equipment. Normally in this configuration you must set
the audio equipment’s input selector to the setting that
specifies the terminal (such as AUX IN) to which the Digital
Keyboard is connected. Use the L-2 (VOLUME) knob to
T-3 (SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK) adjust the volume level.
Outputting Keyboard Notes to a Musical

Instrument Amplifier 2
Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the
amplifier to either of the Digital Keyboard’s T-8 (LINE OUT)
jacks as shown in Figure 2. LINE OUT R jack output is right
channel sound, while LINE OUT L/MONO jack output is left
channel sound. Connecting to the LINE OUT L/MONO jack
only outputs a mixture of both channels. It is up to you to
purchase a connecting cord like the one shown in the
illustration for connection of the amplifier. Use the L-2
(VOLUME) knob to adjust the volume level.
E-11
Connections
Outputting Input from an External Output of External Device Input that is

Affected by the Digital Keyboard’s Effects
Device or a Microphone through
Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the
the Digital Keyboard’s Speakers external device to the Digital Keyboard’s T-4 (INST IN) jack.
You can use the Digital Keyboard’s speakers to output sound The connecting cord should have a standard plug (monaural)
from a CD player, another digital keyboard, or other external on one end and a plug that is compatible with the external
device, or from a microphone. device you are connecting to on the other end. Adjust volume
using the Digital Keyboard’s L-2 (VOLUME) knob.
• Whenever connecting something to the Digital

CD player,
Keyboard, first use the L-2 (VOLUME) knob to set the Portable audio player, etc.
volume to a low level. After connecting, you can adjust
the volume to the level you want.
• Whenever you connect any device to the Digital Standard plug (monaural)
Keyboard, be sure to read the user documentation that
comes with the device.
Outputting Sound with a Microphone
You can connect a dynamic microphone (only) to the Digital
• Digital Keyboard built-in effects (reverb, chorus, DSP) are Keyboard for output thorough the Digital Keyboard’s
not applied to input from the T-5 (AUDIO IN) jack. Input is speakers.
output directly, and is affected by the Digital Keyboard’s
build-in amplifier and L-2 (VOLUME) knob.
• Digital Keyboard built-in effects (reverb, chorus, DSP) are
applied to input from the T-4 (INST IN) and T-6 (MIC IN)
jacks. You also can use the Mixer to adjust how effects are
applied, the speaker stereo pan position, and other
parameters. T-6 (MIC IN) jack
For details, see “Applying Effects to a Sound” (page E-29)
• You can adjust the volume level of microphone input with
and “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).
the T-7 (MIC VOLUME) knob. Microphone volume control
is independent of overall keyboard volume.
Output of External Device Input that is Not
Affected by the Digital Keyboard’s Effects
Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the • Before connecting a microphone, make sure that the
external device to the Digital Keyboard’s T-5 (AUDIO IN) jack. Digital Keyboard and microphone are turned off.
The connecting cord should have a stereo mini plug on one • Before connecting a microphone, set both the L-2
end and a plug that is compatible with the external device you (VOLUME) and T-7 (MIC VOLUME) knobs to low levels.
are connecting to on the other end. Adjust volume using the Adjust volume settings to appropriate levels after
Digital Keyboard’s L-2 (VOLUME) knob. connecting the microphone.
Bundled and Optional

CD player,
Portable audio player, etc. Accessories
Use of unauthorized accessories creates the risk of fire,
Stereo mini plug electric shock, and personal injury.
• You can get information about accessories that are sold

separately for this product from the CASIO catalog
available from your retailer, and from the CASIO website at
the following URL.
http://world.casio.com/
E-12
Selecting and Playing a Tone

L-3
R-1 - R-12
L-1
L-2
R-14
L-14 L-16 R-19

L-13 L-17 R-20
To turn on Digital Keyboard power

• If you press the L-1 (POWER) button only lightly, the
1. Rotate the L-2 (VOLUME) knob towards MIN to display will light up momentarily but power will not turn
set the volume to a low level. on. This does not indicate malfunction. Press the L-1
(POWER) button firmly and completely to turn on
2. Referring to “Connections” (page E-11), power.
connect headphones, amplifier, or other device. • Under its initial configuration, the Digital Keyboard will
return to its default settings whenever you turn it off.
3. Use the L-1 (POWER) button to turn on power. You can change the initial configuration to have the
• The Digital Keyboard display screen will appear as Digital Keyboard remember its latest setup or to apply
shown below, which indicates that it is ready to play a predetermined setup each time you turn it on. For
with a piano tone (using initial power on default details, see “AutoResume (Auto Resume)” (page
settings). E-134) and “Default (Default Settings)” (page E-134).
• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display
while a data save operation is in progress. Do not
perform any other operation while it is displayed.
Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the
memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be
deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the
Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1
(POWER) button is pressed. If this happens, refer to
“Troubleshooting” (page E-150).
• To turn off the Digital Keyboard, press the L-1
(POWER) button again. Auto Power Off
This Digital Keyboard is designed to turn off automatically to
avoid wasting power after no operation is performed for a
preset amount of time. The Auto Power Off trigger time is six
minutes under battery power and four hours under AC
adaptor power.
• Auto Power Off is enabled while “on” is selected for
“AutoPower (Auto Power Off)” (page E-134). The initial
default setting is “on”. To disable Auto Power Off, select
“oFF” for “AutoPower” (Auto Power Off).
• You also can use the procedure below to temporarily
suspend Auto Power Off while it is enabled.
B
E-13
■ To disable Auto Power Off

Selecting a Tone
1. While the Digital Keyboard is turned on, press The tones of this Digital Keyboard are divided among groups,
the L-1 (POWER) button to turn it off. each of which corresponds to one of the 12 TONE buttons.
You can specify a tone by its group and its tone number.
2. While holding down the L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/ Use the following procedure to select a single tone that is
DANCE) button, press the L-1 (POWER) button applied across the entire keyboard.
to turn on the Digital Keyboard.
To select a tone
1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

group and the number of the tone you want to
select.
2. Check to make sure that the @ and A

• Auto Power Off will be disabled at this time. indicators are not on the display.
• If they are displayed, press the R-19 (SPLIT) button
and/or R-20 (LAYER) button to clear both indicators
• Turning off the keyboard after performing the above steps from the display.
will re-enable Auto Power Off.
3. Use buttons R-1 ([A] PIANO) through R-11 ([K]
USER TONES) to select a tone group.
Listening to Demo Tunes
1. While holding down the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/
OFF) button, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)
button.
• The R-11 ([K] USER TONES) button selects the user

tone group. For details, see “Using the Tone Editor”
(page E-44).
• The R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) button selects the
drawbar organ tone group. See “Using Drawbar Organ
Tones” (page E-50) for more information.
• This starts demo tune play.
• The Digital Keyboard has a total of five demo tunes. 4. Use the dial to scroll through the tone numbers
You also can use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a until the one you want is displayed.
demo tune.
Example: Group [C], Number 004
• Pressing the L-14 (dFF) button performs fast forward
play of the demo tune, while the L-13 (sREW) button Number
performs fast backward play. Holding down the L-13
Tone name Group
(sREW) button until playback reaches the beginning
of the current song will stop playback there. Normal
playback will resume when you release the L-13
(sREW) button. Holding down the L-14 (dFF)
button continues fast forward playback, even after the
end of a song is reached.
• You can play along on the keyboard with demo tune
play. Note, however, that you cannot change the tone
assigned to the keyboard. Only the key operations
described above are supported during demo tune
playback.
2. To stop demo tune playback, press the L-16

(PLAY/STOP) button.
E-14 B
5. Now you can play on the keyboard using the • Three tones, two layered tones for the right range and
tone you selected. one tone for the left range of the keyboard (page E-17)
This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part, UPPER 2 part,
and LOWER part (Layer: On, Split: On).
• You also can use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a tone.
Holding down either button will scroll through tone numbers
at high speed. Pressing both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons at
the same time will select tone 001 in the currently selected
group. UPPER 1
LOWER
UPPER 2
Layering and Splitting Tones
You can configure the keyboard to play two different tones at
the same time (Layer) or to play different tones in the left and • You can configure the settings described below to adjust
right ranges (Split). You can even use Layer and Split in each part when using multiple tones in layer and split
combination with each other and play three different tones at configurations.
the same time. To adjust this setting for Go here for more
The UPPER 1 part is used alone when playing an individual each part: information:
tone on the keyboard. When layering two tones, the UPPER 1
part and UPPER 2 parts are used. When splitting the Octave shift Using Octave Shift
keyboard between two tones, the low range of the keyboard (page E-18)
plays the LOWER part. Volume balance Using the Mixer (page E-36)
Stereo position, effect
• One tone across the entire keyboard (page E-14)
(reverb, chorus) levels, and
This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part only (Layer: Off,
other detailed settings
Split: Off).
UPPER 1
• Two layered tones across the entire keyboard (page

E-16)
This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part and UPPER 2
part (Layer: On, Split: Off).
UPPER 1
UPPER 2
• Two tones, one for the left range and one for the right
range of the keyboard (page E-17)
This configuration uses the UPPER 1 part and LOWER part
(Layer: Off, Split: On).
LOWER UPPER 1
E-15
R-15
C-8
L-9
R-16
R-17
L-10 R-14
L-11 R-13
R-19
R-18 R-20
To layer two tones To split the keyboard between two tones

1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the 1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the
group(s) and numbers of the two tones group(s) and numbers of the tones (UPPER 1
(UPPER 1 part tone and UPPER 2 part tone) you part tone and LOWER part tone) you want to
want to use. use.
2. Check to make sure that the @ and A 2. Check to make sure that the @ and A
indicators are not on the display. indicators are not on the display.
• If they are displayed, press the R-19 (SPLIT) button • If they are displayed, press the R-19 (SPLIT) button
and/or R-20 (LAYER) button to clear both indicators and/or R-20 (LAYER) button to clear both indicators
from the display. When neither indicator is displayed, from the display. When neither indicator is displayed,
the tone you select will become the UPPER 1 part tone. the tone you select will become the UPPER 1 part tone.
3. Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the 3. Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the
UPPER 1 part tone. UPPER 1 part tone.
4. Press the R-20 (LAYER) button. 4. Press the R-19 (SPLIT) button.
• This causes the A indicator to appear on the • This causes the @ indicator to appear on the
display. This indicates that the tone you select will display. This indicates that the tone you select will
become the UPPER 2 part tone. become the LOWER part tone.
5. Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the 5. Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the
UPPER 2 part tone. LOWER part tone.
6. Play something on the keyboard to check how 6. Play something on the left and right sides of the
the tones sound layered together. keyboard to confirm that the tones are assigned
properly.
7. To cancel tone layering, press the R-20 (LAYER) • You also can specify the keyboard split point, which is
button again so the A indicator disappears the location where the keyboard splits between the left
from the display. range and right range. For details, see “To specify the
keyboard split point” (page E-17).
7. To cancel keyboard split, press the R-19 (SPLIT)

button so the @ indicator disappears from
the display.
E-16
To specify the keyboard split point To use layer and split together
1. While holding down the R-19 (SPLIT) button, 1. Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure
press the keyboard key that you want to be the under “To layer two tones” (page E-16).
leftmost key in the right side (UPPER 1 part)
range. 2. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the
group and the number of the tone you want to
LOWER part UPPER 1 part assign to for the LOWER part.
3. Press the R-19 (SPLIT) button.

• This causes the @ indicator to appear on the
display. This indicates that the tone you select will
become the LOWER part tone.
Key you press 4. Use the TONE buttons and dial to select the
LOWER part tone.
Split point 5. Play something on the left and right sides of the
keyboard to confirm that the tones are assigned
• The name of the key you press will appear on the
properly.
display as the new split point key name.
• You also can use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the • The right keyboard area plays the UPPER 1 and
displayed split point key name. UPPER 2 tones in a layered configuration, while the left
keyboard area plays the LOWER tone.
2. When you are finished, release the R-19 (SPLIT)
button.
6. To cancel keyboard split, press the R-19 (SPLIT)
button so the @ indicator disappears from
the display.
• The initial default split point is at key F#3.
• During Auto Accompaniment play (page E-24), the
7. To cancel tone layering, press the R-20 (LAYER)
keyboard to the left of the split point becomes the chord button again so the A indicator disappears
keyboard. from the display.
E-17
Raising and Lowering Keyboard Using Octave Shift

Tuning (Transpose) You can use octave shift to individually change the octave of
the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts. You can use
The transpose feature lets you raise or lower the overall
octave shift to raise or lower the octave of a song, to assign
tuning of the keyboard in semitone steps. You can use this
different octaves to the left side and right side keyboards while
feature to adjust keyboard tuning to a key that better matches
the keyboard is split, or to play two notes in different octaves
a vocalist, another musical instrument, etc.
while the keyboard is layered.
1. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) 1. Hold down the R-20 (OCTAVE) button until the
button, press one of the R-14 (–, +) buttons.
octave shift screen shown below appears on
the display.
Octave shift amount (Octave unit)
Part name
• This displays the transpose screen shown below.
• This indicates you can change the UPPER 1 part

octave.
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the

2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) octave shift amount.
button, use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to • You can shift the octave within the range of –2 to 0 to
change the setting value. +2.
• You can change the tuning of the keyboard within the
range of –12 to 00 to +12. 3. If you want to change the octave of the
UPPER 2 part, press the R-20 (OCTAVE) button.
3. Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button. • This will cause “UPPER 2” to appear on the display,
• This exits the transpose screen. indicating that you can change the UPPER 2 part
octave. Perform the same operation as in step 2 to
specify the octave shift amount.
• Setting a transposed value other than 00 will cause the
B indicator to appear on the display.
4. If you want to change the octave of the LOWER
• The current transpose setting is applied to the notes of all part, press the R-20 (OCTAVE) button.
parts (UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, Auto Accompaniment, • This will cause “LOWER” to appear on the display,
etc.) played on the keyboard. The MIDI out note number indicating that you can change the LOWER part octave.
when a keyboard key is pressed is also shifted in Perform the same operation as in step 2 to specify the
accordance with the transpose setting. octave shift amount.
5. Press the R-20 (OCTAVE) button or the R-15

(EXIT) button.
• This exits the octave shift screen.
E-18
Using the Metronome To change the tempo setting

There are two different methods you can use to change the
1. Press the L-9 (METRONOME) button. tempo setting: using the TEMPO buttons or tapping a beat
with a button.
■ To change the tempo using the TEMPO buttons
1. Press the L-10 (TEMPO w) (slower) or L-11

(TEMPO q) (faster) button.
• This will start the metronome.
• The display will show the tempo along with a count of
the measures and beats since you started the
metronome.
• This displays the tempo screen shown below.
Tempo Beat
• If you do not perform any operation for a few seconds,
Measure
the display will return to previous screen automatically.
2. Press the L-9 (METRONOME) button again to 2. Use the L-10 (TEMPO w) and L-11 (TEMPO q)
stop the metronome. buttons to change the tempo (beats per
minute).
To change the beats per measure • Holding down either button will scroll the setting values
at high speed.
1. Hold down the L-9 (BEAT) button until the • You can specify a tempo value in the range of 30 to
metronome beat screen shown below appears 255.
on the display. 3. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.
• This exits the tempo screen.
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

beat setting.
• You can select 0, or a value within the range of 2 to 6.
Specifying 0 for this setting will cause each beat to be
indicated by the same sound (no chime at the
beginning of each measure).
3. Press the L-9 (BEAT) or R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the metronome beat screen.
E-19
■ To adjust the tempo by tapping a beat

Using the Pitch Bend Wheel
1. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) The PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) lets you change the pitch of
button, tap the L-11 (TAP) button four times at notes you are playing by rotating the wheel forward or back.
the speed (tempo) you want to set. Rotating the wheel away from you raises the pitch, while
rotating it towards you lowers it. Releasing the wheel causes
the pitch of the notes to return to normal automatically.
• The first tap of the L-11 (TAP) button will cause the
display shown below to appear.
• Do not have the pitch bend wheel rotated as you turn

on the keyboard.
• You also can change the range of the pitch bend wheel
• The tempo setting will change in accordance with your (bend range) globally or for a specific part. For details, see
tapping speed as soon as you tap the fourth time. “BendRange (Bend Range)” (page E-132) and “Part
• The setting will be canceled if you release the R-13 Parameters” (page E-43).
(FUNCTION) button before tapping the L-11 (TAP)
button four times.
Applying Vibrato to Notes
2. After setting the tempo by tapping, you then You can apply vibrato to notes you play on the keyboard (all
can use the procedure under “To change the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER part notes) by hand. Vibrato is
tempo using the TEMPO buttons” (page E-19) to applied to notes while the S-2 (MODULATION) button is
make fine adjustments. depressed. Releasing the button stops application of vibrato
(under initial default settings).
• Instead of vibrato, you can assign a different DSP effect to

the S-2 (MODULATION) button, if you want. For details,
see information about the following parameters in “DSP
Parameter Settings” (page E-35) and “Tone Parameter
Settings” (page E-48).
– Mod Button (Modulation Button Assign)
– Mod Button On Value (Modulation Button On Value)
– Mod Button Off Value (Modulation Button Off Value)
E-20 B
3. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a

Selecting a Temperament and temperament.
Fine Tuning Its Scale • Selecting a temperament other than 01: Equal will
cause the C indicator to appear on the display.
Use the scale function to select one of the 17 preset
• The following shows the temperament numbers and
temperaments (tunings) for the built-in sound source. You
names that appear on the display.
also can fine tune each note of a scale (from C to B) in
one-cent units. After selecting one of the preset Number Screen Name Preset Temperament
temperaments, you can edit it to suit your particular needs.
01 Equal Equal temperament
You also can specify whether the current scale settings
(temperament setting and fine tuning adjustment) should be 02 Pure Major Just major intonation
applied to Auto Accompaniment (Accomp Scale). 03 Pure Minor Just minor intonation
04 Pythagorean Pythagorean system
• The settings you configure with the scale function are 05 Kirnberger 3 Kirnberger III
retained even when the Digital Keyboard is turned off. 06 Werckmeister Werckmeister 1-3 (III)
07 Mean-Tone Mean tone
To select a preset scale
08 Rast Rast
1. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) 09 Bayati Bayati
button, press the C-8 (SCALE) button to display 10 Hijaz Hijaz
the scale screen, with the 0 located at
11 Saba Saba
“Preset”.
12 Dashti Dashti
13 Chahargah Chahargah
14 Segah Segah
15 Gurjari Todi Gurjari Todi
16 Chandrakauns Chandrakauns
17 Charukeshi Charukeshi
4. Perform the following steps to specify the root

note of a temperament.
(1) Press the R-17 (i) button.
• This displays root note setting screen.
2. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

• This displays a preset temperament selection screen
like the one shown below.
(2) Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
root note (C to B).
• You can also use the keyboard to specify the root
note.
E-21
5. When you are finished, press the R-15 (EXIT) 5. When you are finished making adjustments,
button twice. press the R-15 (EXIT) button twice.
• This will return to the screen that was displayed before • This will return to the screen that was displayed before
you displayed the scale screen. you displayed the scale screen.
Specifying whether the Current Scale

• The root note setting you specify here is retained, even if Settings Should be Applied to Auto
you later change to a different preset temperament. Accompaniment (Accomp Scale)
Fine Tuning a Scale 1. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button, press the C-8 (SCALE) button to display
1. If required, perform the procedure under “To the scale screen.
select a preset scale” (page E-21) to select a
preset temperament. 2. Use the R-17 (i) button to move the 0 to
“AcmpScale”.
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button, press the C-8 (SCALE) button to display
the scale screen.
3. Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to 3. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change
“FineTune” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) the setting value.
button. To do this: Select this setting:
• This displays the scale fine tuning screen like the one Not apply scale settings to Auto oFF
shown below. Accompaniment
Apply scale settings to Auto on
Accompaniment
4. When the setting is the way you want, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button.
• This will return to the screen that was displayed before
you displayed the scale screen.
4. You can adjust the tuning of each individual • The above scale on/off setting affects the Auto
Accompaniment bass part and Chord 1 through Chord 5
note in the scale. parts (A11 through A16). You also can turn scales settings
(1) Use the R-17 (t) button to move the 0 to “Note”, and
on or off for each individual part using the Part Parameter
then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the
(page E-43) “Scale (Part Scale Enable)” setting.
name of the note you want to fine tune.
• You can also press a keyboard key to specify a
note.
(2) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Cent”, and
then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to fine tune the
selected note. You can fine tune a note within the
range of –99 through +99 cents.
• Adjusting all of the notes in the scale to 0 changes
the selected tuning to equal temperament. The
C indicator will be on the display when any note
in the scale has a value other than 0.
E-22
4. Press the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

Playing Arpeggio Phrases ARPEGGIATOR) button.
Automatically (Arpeggiator) • This causes a pointer indicator to appear on the display
next to ARPEG.
With the arpeggiator, you can play various arpeggios and
other phrases automatically by simply pressing keys on the
keyboard. You can select from a number of different
arpeggiator options, including playing arpeggios from a chord,
playing various phrases automatically, and more.
1. Hold down the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button until the type selection Lit
screen shown below appears on the display.
5. Configure arpeggiator settings as required.
• The settings you can configure are described in the
table below. For information about how to configure
settings, see “To change the setting of a function menu
item” (page E-130).
For information about this setting: Go here:
Whether arpeggio should be played ArpegHold
while keyboard keys are depressed or (Arpeggiator Hold)
after the keys are released (page E-132)
The number of times arpeggio is ArpegSpeed
played within one beat (Arpeggiator
Speed) (page
E-132)
When the keyboard is split between ArpegPart
two tones, whether arpeggio should (Arpeggiator Part)
be played when UPPER keyboard or (page E-132)
Type number Type name LOWER keyboard keys are pressed
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the 6. On the keyboard, play a chord or a single note.
• Arpeggio is played in accordance with the currently
arpeggiator type you want to use.
selected arpeggiator type and the note(s) you play.
• You can select one of the arpeggiator types (013
through 162). Refer to the separate “Appendix” for 7. To turn off the arpeggiator, press the R-18
detailed information about supported arpeggiator types.
(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR) button
• When selecting the arpeggiator type, you can assign
the recommended tone for the currently displayed type again.
as the keyboard tone, by holding down the R-18 (AUTO • This causes the pointer indicator next to ARPEG. to
HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR) button until a pointer disappear from the display.
indicator starts to flash on the display next to ARPEG.
Flashing
• For information about type number 001 through 012,

see “Using Auto Harmonize” (page E-28).
3. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the type selection screen.
E-23
Using Auto Accompaniment

R-15
L-3 - L-8
L-10 R-14
L-11
L-12 L-14 L-16

L-13 L-15 L-17 R-18
With Auto Accompaniment, simply select the accompaniment 3. Use the dial to scroll through the rhythm
rhythm you want and the matching accompaniment (drums, numbers until the one you want is displayed.
guitar, etc.) will play automatically when you play a chord with
Example: Group B, Number 005
your left hand. It’s like having your own personal backup
group along with you wherever you go.
This Digital Keyboard has 260 built-in Auto Accompaniment
patterns, which are divided into five groups. You can edit
built-in rhythms to create your own original rhythms (called
“user rhythms”), which you can save in a sixth group. For
more information, see the separate “Appendix”.
Playing an Auto Accompaniment

1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the Rhythm name Group
group and the number of the rhythm you want Number
to use.
• You can also use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a
rhythm number. Holding down either button will scroll
2. Use the buttons from L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/ through rhythm numbers at high speed. Pressing both
DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) to select a of the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time will select
rhythm group. 001 in the currently selected group.
• The L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button is for the user
rhythm group. For details, see “Using the Pattern 4. Use the L-10 (TEMPO w) and L-11 (TEMPO q)
Sequencer” (page E-102). buttons to adjust the tempo setting.
5. Press the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button so the

D indicator is on the display.
• Each press of the button toggles accompaniment
between on (D indicator displayed) and off
(indicator not displayed).
• All accompaniment instrument parts sound while
accompaniment is on (D indicator displayed),
while only percussion instrument parts (drums, etc.)
sound while accompaniment is off (indicator not
displayed).
E-24
6. Press the L-15 (SYNCHRO/ENDING) button. 10. When you are finished, press the L-16 (START/
• This enters synchro standby (Auto Accompaniment STOP) button again to stop Auto
waiting for you to play a chord), with the F Accompaniment.
indicator flashing on the display. The flashing F • Pressing the L-15 (SYNCHRO/ENDING) button instead
indicator means that the normal Auto Accompaniment
of the L-16 (START/STOP) button will play an ending
pattern is standing by.
pattern before stopping Auto Accompaniment play. For
details about ending patterns, see “Modifying Auto
7. You also can use the buttons described below Accompaniment Patterns” (page E-27).
to change to intro or variation pattern standby.
To enter synchro
Display
standby for this Press this button: • You can use the following procedure to adjust the volume
Indicator:
pattern: level of the Auto Accompaniment, without affecting the
Intro L-12 (INTRO) E volume of Digital Keyboard output. For details, see
flashing “AccompVol. (Auto Accompaniment Volume)” (page
E-133).
Variation L-14 (VARIATION/ H • You can change the size of the chord keyboard by using
FILL-IN) flashing the split feature to move the split point (page E-17). The
For details about intro and variation patterns, see “Modifying keyboard keys to the left of the split point make up the
Auto Accompaniment Patterns” (page E-27). chord keyboard.
8. Play the chord you want on the chord keyboard

(left keyboard keys).
• Auto Accompaniment will start playing when you play
the chord.
• To start percussion part play without playing a chord,
press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.
Example: To play a C chord
Chord keyboard
Melody keyboard
• The chord root and type that corresponds to the keys

you press appear in the chord area of the display.
9. Play other chords with your left hand as you

play the melody with your right hand.
• You can use “CASIO Chord” or other simplified chord
fingering modes to play chords. For details, see
“Selecting a Chord Fingering Mode” in the following
section.
• You can use the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) and L-14
(VARIATION/FILL-IN) buttons to modify
accompaniment patterns. For details, see “Modifying
Auto Accompaniment Patterns” (page E-27).
E-25
■ Fingered 1, 2, 3
Selecting a Chord Fingering Mode With these three chord fingering modes, you play chords on
While Auto Accompaniment is playing, you use the chord the chord keyboard using their normal chord fingerings. Some
keyboard to specify the chord root and type. The area of the chord forms are abbreviated, and can be fingered with one or
keyboard to the left of the split point (page E-17) is the chord two keys. For information about the types of chords you can
keyboard. The illustration below shows the chord keyboard finger and their fingerings, see the “Fingering Guide” (page
range under WK-7600 initial default settings. E-160).
Chord keyboard Fingered 1: Play the component notes of the chord on the
keyboard.
Melody Keyboard
Fingered 2: Unlike Fingered 1, 6th input is not possible with
this mode.
Fingered 3: Unlike Fingered 1, this mode allows input of
fraction chords with the lowest keyboard note as
the bass note.
You can select from among the following five chord fingering
■ CASIO Chord
modes.
With “CASIO Chord”, you can use simplified fingerings to play
1: Fingered 1 the four types of chords described below.
2: Fingered 2 Chord Type Example
3: Fingered 3
Major Chords C (C Major)
4: CASIO Chord
Press one key, whose note C C#DE b E F F#GAb A Bb B C C#DE b E F
5: Full Range Note

corresponds to the chord name
name.
To select a chord fingering mode • To play C Major, press any
C key in the chord keyboard.
1. Hold down the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button The octave of the note does
until the chord fingering mode selection screen not matter.
shown below appears on the display. Minor Chords Cm (C minor)
Press the chord keyboard key C C#DE b E F F#GAb A Bb B C C#DE b E F
that corresponds to the major

chord, while also pressing one
other chord keyboard key to
the right.
Seventh Chords C7 (C seventh)
Press the chord keyboard key C C#DE b E F F#GAb A Bb B C C#DE b E F
that corresponds to the major

chord, while also pressing two
Chord fingering mode
other chord keyboard keys to
the right.
Minor Seventh Chords Cm7 (C minor seventh)
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a Press the chord keyboard key C C#DE b E F F#GAb A Bb B C C#DE b E F
chord fingering mode. that corresponds to the major

chord, while also pressing
3. Press the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button or the three other chord keyboard
R-15 (EXIT) button. keys to the right.
• This exits the chord fingering mode selection screen. When pressing more than one chord keyboard key, it makes
no difference whether the additional keys are white or black.
■ Full Range Chord

With this chord fingering mode, you can use the full range of
the keyboard to play chords and the melody. For information
about the types of chords you can finger and their fingerings,
see the “Fingering Guide” (page E-160).
E-26
Modifying Auto Accompaniment Using One-Touch Presets

Patterns One-Touch Preset gives you one-touch access to tone and
tempo settings that go well with the currently selected Auto
There are six different Auto Accompaniment patterns, shown
Accompaniment rhythm pattern.
below. You can switch between patterns during
accompaniment play and even modify patterns. Use buttons
L-12 through L-15 to select the pattern you want. To perform using a one-touch preset
L-12 L-13 L-14 L-15 1. If rhythm is playing, press the L-16 (START/
STOP) button to stop it.
2. Select the rhythm (excluding user rhythms) you

want to use.
3. While holding down the L-7 ([E] PIANO

RHYTHMS) button, press the L-8 ([F] USER
RHYTHMS) button.
Intro *1 Normal Variation Ending *4
Normal fill-in Variation fill-in

*2 *3
*1 Press at the beginning of a song. Accompaniment play • Settings for the following items are configured
proceeds with the normal pattern after the intro pattern is appropriately for the rhythm you selected in step 2.
complete. Pressing the L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button – Tones for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER
before pressing this button will proceed with the variation parts
pattern after the intro pattern is complete. – Octave shift for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and
LOWER parts
*2 Press while a normal pattern is playing to insert a fill-in
– Layer and split on/off
pattern.
– Accompaniment on/off
*3 Press while a variation pattern is playing to insert a fill-in
– Reverb on/off and type
variation pattern.
– Chorus type
*4 Press at the end of a song. This will play an ending pattern
– Auto harmonize or Arpeggiator on/off and type
and then stop Auto Accompaniment.
– Tempo
• Also, the F indicator flashes on the display to
indicate that the normal Auto Accompaniment pattern is
standing by.
4. Start playing something on the keyboard.

• Perform the procedure starting from step 7 under
“Playing an Auto Accompaniment” (page E-24).
• One-Touch Presets are not supported for user rhythms

(F:001 through F:100).
• You can recall one-touch preset settings even if a rhythm is
already playing when you perform step 3 of the above
procedure. In this case, rhythm play will continue without
going into synchro standby.
E-27
Using Auto Harmonize Type

Number
Type
Name
Description
Auto harmonize lets you add harmony to melody notes you
Adds 3-note open harmony, for a
play with your right hand. You can select any one of 12 Auto 009 4WayOpen
total of four notes.
harmonize settings.
Adds 3-note close harmony, for a
010 4WayClos
total of four notes.
To play using auto harmonize
011 Block Adds block chord notes.
1. Hold down the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/ 012 Big Band Adds big band style harmony.
ARPEGGIATOR) button until the type selection
• For information about type numbers greater than 012,
screen shown below appears on the display. see “Playing Arpeggio Phrases Automatically
(Arpeggiator)” (page E-23).
3. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button.

• This exits the type selection screen.
4. Press the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/

ARPEGGIATOR) button.
• This causes a pointer indicator to appear on the display
next to A.HAR.
Lit
Type number Type name 5. Play chords and the melody on the keyboard.
• Harmony will be added to your melody notes based on
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the the chords you play.
auto harmonize type you want to use. 6. To turn off auto harmonize, press the R-18
• You can select one of the type numbers (001 through
(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR) button
012) described in the table below.
again.
Type Type • This causes the pointer indicator next to A.HAR. to
Description
Number Name disappear.
Adds close (separated by two to
001 Duet 1 four degrees) one-note harmony
below the melody note.
Adds open (separated by more
002 Duet 2 than 4 to 6 degrees) 1-note
harmony below the melody note.
003 Country Adds country style harmony.
Adds the note from the next lower
004 Octave
octave.
005 5th Adds the fifth degree note.
Adds 2-note open harmony, for a
006 3WayOpen
total of three notes.
Adds 2-note close harmony, for a
007 3WayClos
total of three notes.
Adds harmony that is optimal for
008 Strings
strings.
E-28
Applying Effects to a Sound

You can apply a variety of different acoustic effects to the sounds produced by the Digital Keyboard. The built-in effects include a
wide variety of variations that give you access to a selection of general digital effects.
• The Digital Keyboard also lets you apply effects to input from the T-4 (INST IN) jack and T-6 (MIC IN) jack.
Configuration of Effects
The following shows how Digital Keyboard effects are configured.
• Items such as “Reverb Send” that are indicated by the symbol are all mixer settings. For details, see “Using the Mixer”
(page E-36).
• Chorus and DSP cannot be used at the same time.
■ Chorus Effect Mode Configuration

The chorus effect mode is enabled while “Chorus” is selected for the “Chorus/DSP” effect parameter. Chorus and reverb can be
used in the chorus effect mode.
Part A01-A16, B01-B16

Output
Part Volume/Pan
Reverb Send Master

Tone Generator
Volume/Pan
Chorus Send Reverb
External Input
Chorus
Volume/Pan
Mic In
Auto Level Reverb Send
Noise Gate
Inst In Control
Mono
Chorus Send
Stereo
• For information about “Chorus/DSP”, see “Selecting an Effect” (page E-31).
E-29
■ DSP Effect Mode Configuration

The DSP effect mode is enabled while “DSP” is selected for the “Chorus/DSP”effect parameter. DSP and reverb can be used in the
DSP effect mode.
Part A01-A16, B01-B16

Output
Part Volume/Pan
DSP Off Master

Tone Generator Volume/Pan
On Reverb Send
Reverb
DSP Reverb Send
External Input
DSP
Volume/Pan
DSP Volume/Pan
Mic In
Auto Level DSP Off
Noise Gate
Control
On Reverb Send Mono
Inst In Stereo
• Reverb
This type of effect simulates acoustic spaces. There are 10 different reverb effects, including room and hall.
• Chorus
This type of effect increases the depth of notes and applies vibrato to notes. There are five different chorus effects.
• DSP
This type of effect is inserted between the sound source and output. There are a total of 100 different DSP effects, including
distortion and modulation. You also can transfer DSP effects from a computer or create DSP data on the Digital Keyboard, and
store up to 100 user DSP effects in Digital Keyboard memory. For details, see “Creating a User DSP” (page E-33) and
“Connecting to a Computer” (page E-145).
E-30
R-15
C-7
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
Selecting an Effect
• A pointer indicator is displayed next to REVERB when
Effects are divided among different types (reverb, chorus,
anything other than “oFF” is selected for the reverb type.
DSP), so first you need to use the procedure below to select
The pointer indicator is not displayed next to REVERB
an effect type.
when “oFF” is selected.
• You can use Reverb Send to adjust how reverb is applied
To add reverb to sounds to the tone of each keyboard or Auto Accompaniment part.
For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).
button, press the C-7 (EFFECT) button. To add the chorus effect to sounds

button, press the C-7 (EFFECT) button to
display the effect setting screen.
• This displays the effect setting screen shown below.
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the

reverb type you want to use.
• Refer to the separate “Appendix” for information about
supported reverb types.
• To turn off reverb, select “oFF” here.
3. Press the C-7 (EFFECT) button or the R-15

(EXIT) button.
• This exits the effect setting screen.
E-31
2. If you want, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to 8. Use the mixer to adjust the chorus send of the
move the thick brackets (%) to the “DSP part to which you want to apply chorus.
Disable”setting, and then use the R-14 (–, +) • You can use “Cho.Send” (Part Chorus Send, page
buttons to change the setting to “on”. E-43) to adjust how chorus is applied to the tone of
• For more information about this setting, see the each keyboard or Auto Accompaniment part. The initial
default setting is 0 for the chorus send of all parts, so
“Important!” note below.
change the settings to a chorus send value greater than
• If you turning on the “DSP Disable” setting, you should
skip steps 3 and 4 below. 0 for all parts to which you want to apply the chorus
effect. For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick
brackets (%) to the “Chorus/DSP” setting.
• Selecting a tone with DSP causes the “Chorus/DSP”
4. Use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select “Chorus”. setting to change automatically to the “DSP” (DSP
• This enters the chorus effect mode, which enables the effect mode), so the chorus effect will not be available.
use of the chorus effect. If you want the chorus effect always to be available,
change the “DSP Disable” setting to “on”. This will
5. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick keep the Digital Keyboard in the chorus effect mode.
brackets (%) to the “Chorus” setting.
• A pointer indicator is displayed next to CHORUS when

“Chorus” is selected for the “Chorus/DSP” setting. The
pointer indicator is not displayed next to CHORUS when
“oFF” is selected for the chorus type or when “DSP” is
selected for the “Chorus/DSP” setting.
• Selecting “Chorus” for the “Chorus/DSP” setting will cause
the “DSP Line” (Part DSP Line, page E-43) setting for all
parts to be changed to “oFF”.
To use a DSP
chorus type you want to use. 1. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
• Refer to the separate “Appendix” for information about button, press the C-7 (EFFECT) button to
supported chorus types. display the effect setting screen.
(EXIT) button.
• Check to make sure that the “DSP Disable” setting is

“oFF”. If it is “on”, change it to “oFF”.

brackets (%) to “Chorus/DSP”.
3. Use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select “DSP”.

• This enters the DSP effect mode, which enables the
use of the DSP effect.
E-32

brackets (%) to the “DSP” setting. Creating a User DSP
• This causes the number and name of the currently You can create a user DSP by editing one of the built-in
selected preset DSP to appear within the thick brackets preset DSPs.
(%) on the display.
User DSP Numbers
DSP areas numbered 101 through 200 are for storage of user
DSPs. You can have up to 100 user DSPs stored in memory
at one time. To recall a stored user DSP, use the same
procedure you use to recall a preset DSP. See “To use a
DSP” (page E-32) for more information.
To create and save a user DSP
1. Referring to the “DSP Type List” (page E-156),

5. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the select the DSP type you want to edit in order to
preset DSP you want to use. create your user DSP.
• DSPs with the leading numbers 001 through 100 (and
“ton”) are preset DSPs. See “Preset DSP List” (page 2. Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “DSP
E-155) for information about preset DSP numbers and Edit”.
names.
• DSP types with the leading numbers 101 through 200
are user DSPs. For details, see “Creating a User DSP”
(page E-33).

(EXIT) button.
• A pointer indicator is displayed next to DSP when “DSP” is

selected for the “Chorus/DSP” setting. 3. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• Maximum polyphony is reduced by a maximum of two • This displays page one of the DSP editor screen. Use
notes when playing on the keyboard while a DSP is in use. this screen to select the DSP type.
• You also can adjust how a DSP is applied (DSP output
enabled/disabled, DSP output volume, DSP output pan, Total number of pages
etc.) For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36). Currently displayed page
DSP type DSP number
• You can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to scroll

between pages.

DSP type.
E-33
5. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to 10. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the
the parameter you want to change. destination user DSP number you want.
11. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the

cursor to the name character position you want
to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
buttons to select the character you want.
• See “Supported Input Characters” (page E-160) for
information about the characters you can input for the
name.
• To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons
• For information about the operation and the setting at the same time.
range of each parameter, see “DSP Parameter
Settings” (page E-35). 12. After everything is the way you want, press the
R-16 (ENTER) button.
6. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the • A message (Replace?) will appear on the display to
setting value. confirm whether you want to replace the existing data
• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time with the new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to
returns a parameter to its initial default setting. replace the existing data with the new data.
• Changing the DSP parameter while a note is being
output from the Digital Keyboard may cause noise to be
generated. This does not indicate malfunction. • The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required to configure perform any other operation while it is displayed.
other parameters. Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the
8. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button. deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the
• This displays the confirmation screen shown below. Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1
To cancel the editor operation without saving the edited

results, press the R-14 (NO) button.
9. Press the R-14 (YES) button.

• This displays a screen for specifying the destination
user DSP number and DSP name.
Destination user DSP number
DSP name
E-34
DSP Parameter Settings

The table below shows the parameters that can be configured on the DSP editor screen.
The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial defaults.
Parameter Name Description Setting Range
Parameters 1 through 8 The number of parameters and settings available for each parameter –
depends on the DSP type. For details, see “DSP Parameter List” (page
E-157).
DSP RevSend Specifies how much of the post-DSP sound should be sent to reverb. 0 - 40* - 127
(DSP Reverb Send)
Mod Button*1 Specifies the function assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) button when oFF*, 1 - 8*2
(Modulation Button Assign) “DSP” is selected for the “Mod Setting” tone parameter (page E-49).
Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns the corresponding DSP
parameter (1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the button when “oFF” is
selected for this parameter.
Mod Button On Value*1 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2 *3
(Modulation Button On Value) (MODULATION) button works while the button is depressed.
Mod Button Off Value*1 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2 *3
(Modulation Button Off Value) (MODULATION) button works while the button is released.
Rot Button*4 Specifies the function assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/FAST) oFF*, 1 - 8*2
(Rotary Button Assign) button.
Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns the corresponding DSP
parameter (1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the button when “oFF” is
selected for this parameter.
Rot Button On Value*4 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY *5
(Rotary Button On Value) SLOW/FAST) button works while the button is lit.
Rot Button Off Value*4 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY *5
(Rotary Button Off Value) SLOW/FAST) button works while the button is unlit.
*1 Included in the “Mod Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Mod Button” and then press
the R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to
change.
*2 Setting range depends on the selected DSP type.
*3 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Mod Button” setting.
*4 Included in the “Rot Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Rot Button” and then press the
R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to change.
*5 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Rot Button” setting.
B
E-35
Using the Mixer

R-14 R-17
C-7 R-13 R-15 R-16
D-2
D-1 D-3 D-4 - D-12 C-17
Mixer Overview This

part:
Is used for this:
Go here for more
information:
The sound source of this Digital Keyboard is capable of Auto Accompaniment “Using Auto
sounding up to 32 individual parts simultaneously. Each part A09
percussion part Accompaniment” (page
can be controlled individually, and each part can be E-24)
Auto Accompaniment drums
configured to sound a different musical instrument. Different A10
part
tones can be assigned to each part when using layer and split
to sound multiple tones at the same time, and to sound Auto Accompaniment bass
A11
multiple instruments at the same time with Auto part
Accompaniment. A12 to Auto Accompaniment Chord 1
The mixer can be used to assign such tones and to configure A16 part through Chord 5 part
other settings for each part, and to configure global effect
“Using the Song
settings applied to all parts. The mixer provides you with the
Song sequencer track B01 Sequencer” (page
means to make fine adjustments to a wide variety of settings, through B16, tracks 1 through E-68),
from note generation to note output. B01 to 16 during playback of a MIDI “Playing a Music File
B16 file from a memory card, CH1 from a Memory Card”
How Parts are Organized through CH16 during MIDI (page E-142),
receive “Connecting to a
This Digital Keyboard has a total of 32 parts: A01 through Computer” (page E-145)
A16, and B01 through B16. Each part has a specific purpose.
Use the table below as a reference to determine the purpose *1 UPPER 1 part recorded to the song sequencer system
of each part when using the mixer to configure the settings of track.
a part. *2 UPPER 2 part recorded to the song sequencer system
track.
This Go here for more
Is used for this: *3 LOWER part recorded to the song sequencer system
part: information:
track.
A01 Manual play UPPER 1 part “Layering and Splitting
Tones” (page E-15)
A02 Manual play UPPER 2 part
A03 Manual play LOWER part
“Using Auto Harmonize”
A04 Auto harmonize tone
(page E-28)
A05 UPPER 1 part*1 “Using the Song
*2 Sequencer” (page E-68)
A06 UPPER 2 part
A07 LOWER part*3
“Using the Metronome”
A08 Metronome sound
(page E-19)
E-36
Using the Mixer
• When you move the thick brackets (%) to one of the

Mixer Operation setting values of a part parameter, all of the part
parameter values of the Group (A or B) to which the
part belongs are indicated by level meter black boxes.
To change mixer parameters
1. Press the C-7 (MIXER) button.
• This causes the mixer screen to appear. 4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
Currently selected setting setting value.
(MASTER, DSP, EXT(M/I), or A01 to A16/B01 to B16) • Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time
returns a parameter to its initial default setting.
• You also can change the settings of parameters using
the D-1 (PART/COMMON), D-2 (GROUP A/B), and
D-3 (1-8/9-16) buttons, and sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to
D-12 (MASTER). For more information, see “Using the
Sliders to Change Parameter Settings” (page E-38).
• While the “Part” (part on/off) setting of a part parameter
is being configured, pressing both of the R-14 (–, +)
Parameter/Setting value buttons at the same time will change the setting to “Sol”
(Solo). For details, see “Part Parameters” (page E-43).
Currently selected setting part
(when currently selected setting is A01 to A16/B01 to B16)
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 as required to
configure other parameters.
2. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the 6. To exit the mixer, press the C-7 (MIXER) button
mixer parameter you want to change.
or the R-15 (EXIT) button.
• You can select master (MASTER), effect (DSP),
• This exits the mixer screen.
microphone/instrument input (EXT(M/I)), or a part (A01
through A16, B01 through B16). The currently selected
setting is shown in the line two of the display.
• While a part is selected, you can toggle between Group • While master (MASTER), effect (DSP) or microphone/
A and Group B by pressing both of the R-17 (u, i) instrument input (EXT(M/I)) is selected in step 2 above for
buttons at the same time. setting, you also can perform normal keyboard play (play
using layer, split, and Auto Accompaniment).
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick • While an individual part (A01 through A16, B01 through
brackets (%) to the parameter you want to B16) is selected in step 2 above for setting, pressing a
keyboard key will sound only notes of the selected part. All
change.
other types of performance operations (layer, split, Auto
• The parameters that can be configured depend on the
Accompaniment, etc.) are disabled.
currently selected setting. For details, refer to the
sections shown in the table below.
When this setting is These parameters can be
selected: configured:
MASTER MASTER Parameters
(page E-41)
EXT(M/I) MIC/INST Parameters (External
MIC IN/INST IN <EXT(M/I)>)
(page E-42)
DSP DSP Parameters (page E-41)
A01 to A16/B01 to B16 Part Parameters (page E-43)
B
E-37
Using the Mixer
Using the Sliders to Change Parameter Settings

While the mixer screen is displayed, use sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-12 (MASTER) to change the displayed parameter settings. The
D-1 (PART/COMMON), D-2 (GROUP A/B) and D-3 (1-8/9-16) buttons are used to specify the parts that correspond to sliders D-4
(1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16).
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12
The following describes the operation of these buttons and sliders while the mixer screen is displayed.
● D-1 (PART/COMMON) button:

Each press toggles the mixer screen between master parameter settings (MASTER) and the settings of one of the part (A01
through A16, B01 through B16) parameters.
● D-2 (GROUP A/B) button:

Each press toggles the part parameter setting screen between one of the parts in group L (A01 through A16) and one of the
parts in group M (B01 through B16).
● D-3 (1-8/9-16) button:

Each press toggles the parts that correspond to parameter operations by sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16) between A01
through A08 (or B01 through B08) and A09 through A16 (or B09 through B16).
E-38
Using the Mixer
● Sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) through D-11 (8/16): 4. Next, to adjust the volumes of parts A09
Allow configuration of the following parameter settings in through A16, press the D-3 (1-8/9-16) button.
accordance with the currently displayed mixer setting.
When this setting These parameter settings can be
screen is displayed: configured:
MASTER Parameters Slider D-4 (1/9/EXT):
(page E-41), MIC/INST parameters*
MIC/INST Parameters Slider D-5 (2/10/DSP):
(External MIC IN/ DSP parameters* 5. Use sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16) to adjust
INST IN <EXT(M/I)>) Sliders D-6 (3/11) to D-11 (8/16): the volume of each part (A09 through A16).
(page E-42), Parameters of part assigned to
DSP Parameters each slider*
(page E-41)
Part Parameters Sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to
(page E-43) D-11 (8/16):
Parameters of part assigned to
each slider*
* Operating a slider whose setting does not correspond to
anything on the currently displayed setting screen will
automatically switch to the setting screen that corresponds
to the slider. For example, if you operate slider D-4 (1/9/
EXT) while the master parameter setting screen is
displayed, the display will automatically switch to the MIC/
INST parameter setting screen.
● Slider D-12 (MASTER):

Changes the master parameter setting. Operating this
slider while any screen other than the master parameter
setting screen is displayed will automatically switch to the
master parameter setting screen.
■ Setting Operation Example: To adjust the volume

of parts A01 through A16
1. While the mixer setting screen is displayed, use

the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select one of the
parts (A01 through A08).
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“Volume”.
• This enables modification of the part volume setting.
3. Use sliders D-4 (1/9/EXT) to D-11 (8/16) to adjust

the volume of each part (A01 through A08).
• As you move a slider to change a part volume, the
setting is reflected in the value inside the thick brackets
(%) and on the level meter.
B
E-39
Using the Mixer
To initialize all mixer parameters To change the information displayed by the

level meter while configuring part parameter
settings
• For details about how initial default settings are configured
when you perform the following procedure, see “Parameter 1. While the mixer screen is displayed, hold down
List” (page E-162). the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the
C-17 (MENU) button.
1. While the mixer screen is displayed, hold down • This displays the mixer menu.
the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the
C-17 (MENU) button. 2. Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to
• This displays the mixer menu screen with the 0 next to “Display” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
“Initialize”. button.
3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the

setting.
To select display of this
Select this setting:
information:
Part parameter setting values Param
Volume level Meter
4. After the setting is the way you want, press the

2. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.
3. In response to the “Sure?” message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to
initialize all mixer parameters or the R-14 (NO)
button to cancel.
E-40
Using the Mixer
Mixer Parameter Settings

The tables below show the parameters that can be configured on the mixer screen.
MASTER Parameters
MASTER parameters include items for adjusting the volume level, pan position, and other settings that are applied globally to all
parts.
Volume Specifies the maximum volume level of Digital Keyboard output. 0 to 127*
(Master Volume) The level set here is the maximum level that can be set with the L-2 (VOLUME)
knob.
Pan Specifies the stereo pan position of all sound output by the Digital Keyboard. –64 to 0* to +63
(Master Pan) 0 indicates the center, while a smaller values shifts to the left and a larger value
shifts to the right.
DSP Parameters
DSP parameters include DSP-related settings that are applied globally to all parts.
• DSP parameter setting cannot be changed while “on” is selected for the “DSP Disable” effect setting. See “To add the
chorus effect to sounds” (page E-31) for information about “DSP Disable”. If you want to change DSP parameter
settings, change the “DSP Disable” setting to “oFF”.
Cho/DSP Specifies whether the Digital Keyboard’s sound source should go through Chorus*, DSP
(Chorus/DSP) the chorus or DSP.*1 This setting item is linked to the “Chorus/DSP”*2 item
on the effect setting screen. The settings below cannot be configured
whenever this parameter is “Chorus”.
Part Specifies if a note should be output (on) or not output (oFF) after it passes oFF, on*
(DSP Output Enable) through the DSP.
Volume Specifies the post-DSP volume level.*1 0 to 127*
(DSP Output Volume)
Pan Specifies the post-DSP send stereo pan position. 0 indicates the center, –64 to 0* to +63
(DSP Output Pan) while a smaller values shifts to the left and a larger value shifts to the right.
Rev.Send Specifies how much reverb is applied to the post-DSP send note. 0 to 40* to 127
(DSP Output Reverb Send)
*1 See the block diagram under “Configuration of Effects” (page E-29).

*2 See “To add the chorus effect to sounds” (page E-31) and “To use a DSP” (page E-32).
E-41
Using the Mixer
MIC/INST Parameters (External MIC IN/INST IN <EXT(M/I)>)

MIC/INST parameters include settings related to the T-4 (INST IN) and T-6 (MIC IN) terminals.
Part Specifies if sound input should be output (on) or not output (oFF). oFF, on*
(Mic/Inst Enable)
Volume Specifies the volume level of sound input. 0 to 80* to 127
(Mic/Inst Volume)*1
Pan Specifies the stereo pan position of sound input. 0 indicates the center, while a –64 to 0* to +63
(Mic/Inst Pan) smaller values shifts to the left and a larger value shifts to the right.
DSP Line Specifies whether DSP should be applied to sound input. oFF*, on
(Mic/Inst DSP Line)
Rev.Send Specifies how much reverb is applied to sound input. 0 to 40* to 127
(Mic/Inst Reverb Send)
Cho.Send Specifies how much chorus effect is applied to sound input. 0* to 127
(Mic/Inst Chorus Send)
N.Thresh Cuts low-volume input sounds, which decreases noise. Allows a signal to pass 0 to 20* to 127
(Mic/Inst Noise Gate through if it is above the set threshold (gate open). Does not allow a signal to
Threshold)*1 pass if it is below the threshold (gate closed).
N.Release Specifies the amount of time for the gate to go from open to fully closed when an 0 to 64* to 127
(Mic/Inst Noise Gate input sound signal falls below the threshold value specified by “N.Thresh”.
Release)*1 Setting 0 will abruptly cut off the sound, while a larger value will cause the gate
to close more slowly.
Auto Level Automatically controls the input signal level. Selecting “oFF” disables this oFF*, 1 to 3
(Mic/Inst Auto Level feature, while a larger value applies a greater degree of control.
Control)*1
*1 See the block diagram under “Configuration of Effects” (page E-29).
E-42 B
Using the Mixer
Part Parameters
Part parameters include setting items that can be adjusted for parts A01 through A16 and B01 through B16.
TONE Specifies a tone for each part. When configuring this parameter, you can use the A:001 to L:100
(Part Tone) buttons R-1 ([A] PIANO) through R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) to select a tone
group.
Part Specifies if the notes of a particular part should be output (on) or not output (oFF). oFF, on*
(Part On/Off) When a part is turned on, the part number is displayed along the bottom of the level
meter. Part numbers are not displayed for parts that are turned off.
When playing back a MIDI file or song sequencer song, a “Sol” (Solo) option can be
specified to play a specific part only. To switch to “Sol”, press both R-14 (–, +)
buttons at the same time.
Volume Specifies the volume level of each part. 0 to 127*
(Part Volume)
Pan Specifies the stereo pan position of each part. 0 indicates the center, while a smaller –64 to 0* to +63
(Part Pan) values shifts to the left and a larger value shifts to the right.
CoarseTune Specifies, in semitone steps, the pitch of the notes of each part. –24 to 0* to +24
(Part Coarse Tune)
FineTune Specifies, in cent steps, the pitch of the notes of each part. –99 to 0* to +99
(Part Fine Tune)
BendRange Specifies the bend range of each part. 0 to 2* to 24
(Part Bend Range)
DSP Line Specifies whether DSP should be applied to each part. Changing this setting from oFF*, on
(Part DSP Line) “oFF” to “on” automatically switches the “Chorus/DSP” setting (page E-41) to “DSP”.
Rev.Send Specifies how much reverb is applied to each part. 0 to 40* to 127
(Part Reverb Send) No reverb is applied at all when this setting is 0, while maximum reverb is applied
when it is 127.
Cho.Send Specifies how much chorus is applied to each part. 0* to 127
(Part Chorus Send) No chorus is applied at all when this setting is 0, while maximum chorus is applied
when it is 127.
Scale Specifies whether scale (page E-21) settings should be applied (on) or should not be oFF, on*
(Part Scale Enable) applied (oFF). Equal temperament is applied to parts when this setting is “oFF”.
E-43
Using the Tone Editor

R-15 R-11
C-8
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
C-17
You can create a user tone by editing one of the built-in preset
tones. Tone Creation Overview
The preset tones built into this Digital Keyboard consist of a
number of parameters. To create a user tone, you first recall a
• This section covers editing of preset tone groups A through preset tone (A:001 to J:128) and then modify its parameters to
J. change it to your own original tone.
• For information about editing group L (drawbar organ) Note that drum set sounds (J:129 to J:146) cannot be used as
tones, see “Editing Drawbar Organ Tones” (page E-52). the basis of a user tone.
The illustration nearby shows the parameters that make up
the preset tones, and what each parameter does. As can be
seen in the illustration, parameters can be divided into four
groups, each of which is described in detail below.
Volume Characteristic
Parameters
• Attack Time
• Release Time
• Cutoff Frequency
Tone Pitch Parameters

Tone • Vibrato Type
Characteristic • Vibrato Depth Output
Waveform • Vibrato Rate
• Vibrato Delay
• Tone
• Octave Shift
Setting
Tone Characteristic
Setting Parameters
• Volume
• Touch Sense
• Reverb Send
• Chorus Send
• DSP Line
• DSP Type
• DSP Parameters
E-44
(1) Tone Characteristic Waveform (3) Tone Pitch Parameters

• Tone Setting • Vibrato Type, Vibrato Delay, Vibrato Rate, Vibrato
Specifies which of the preset tones should be used as the Depth
original tone. These parameters adjust the vibrato effect, which causes
periodic changes in the tone.
(2) Volume Characteristic Parameters • Octave Shift
These parameters control how the tone changes over time, This parameter controls the octave of all tones.
from when the keyboard key is pressed until the tone decays.
You can specify changes in volume and sound (4) Tone Characteristic Setting Parameters
characteristics.
• Volume
• Attack time This parameter controls the overall volume of the tone.
This is the rate or time it takes for the tone to reach its highest
• Touch Sense
volume level. You can specify a fast rate, where the tone
This parameter controls changes in volume and timbre in
reaches its highest volume level immediately, a slow rate accordance with the relative amount of pressure applied to
where it gradually rises, or something in between.
the keyboard keys. You can specify more volume for stronger
• Release time pressure and less volume or a lighter pressure, or you can
This is the rate or time it takes for the tone volume to fall to specify the same volume regardless of how much pressure is
zero after a keyboard key is released. You can specify a applied to the keys.
release that ranges from a sudden fall to zero, to one that
• Reverb Send, Chorus Send, DSP Line, DSP Type, DSP
gradually falls to zero. Parameters
These parameters control the effects applied to tones.
Note ends
Envelope
Time
A R
Key pressed Key released
A : Attack time
R : Release time
• Cutoff Frequency
The cutoff frequency is a parameter for adjusting timbre by
cutting any frequency that is higher than a specific frequency.
A larger cutoff frequency produces a brighter (harder) timbre,
while a smaller frequency produces a darker (softer) timbre.
Level
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
E-45

Creating a User Tone setting value.
• Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time
User Tone Numbers returns a parameter to its initial default setting.
Tone areas numbered K:001 through K:100 are for storage of 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required to configure
user tones. You can have up to 100 user tones stored in other parameters.
memory at one time. You can recall a stored user tone by
pressing the R-11 ([K] USER TONES) button. See “To select 6. To save a rhythm after you edit it, hold down
a tone” (page E-14). the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the
C-17 (MENU) button.
To create and save a user tone • This displays the tone editor menu.
1. Select the tone you want to edit in order to 7. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
create your user tone. • This displays a screen for specifying the destination
• Select the tone you want to edit from group A through J user tone number and tone name.
(preset tones) or group K (user tones).
Destination user tone number
• The parameters you can edit for group L (drawbar
organ) tones are different from those that you can edit
for group A through K tones. See “Editing Drawbar
Organ Tones” (page E-52) for more information.
2. Press the C-8 (TONE EDITOR) button.
Tone name
• This displays the tone editor screen.
Total number of pages

destination user tone number you want.
Currently displayed page
information about the characters you can input for the
name.
at the same time.
Parameter name Current setting
10. After everything is the way you want, press the
Currently selected parameter R-16 (ENTER) button.
(Enclosed by thick brackets %).
• A message (Replace?) will appear on the display to
• You can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to scroll confirm whether you want to replace the existing data
between pages. with the new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to
replace the existing data with the new data.
the parameter you want to change.
• For information about the operation and the setting
range of each parameter, see “Tone Parameter
Settings” (page E-48).
E-46

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button in place of step 6 displays

the confirmation screen shown below. Pressing the R-14
(YES) button at this time will display the tone save screen in
step 7.

E-47
Tone Parameter Settings

The table below shows the parameters that can be configured on the tone editor screen. For information about each parameter,
also refer to “Tone Creation Overview” (page E-44).

AttackTime Specifies the time until a note starts to sound after a key is pressed. –64 to 0* to +63
(Attack Time)
ReleasTime Specifies the time a note continues to sound after a key is released. –64 to 0* to +63
(Release Time)
CutOff Adjusts timbre by attenuating note components that are higher than a certain –64 to 0* to +63
(Cutoff Frequency) frequency. A larger value produces a brighter, harder sound, while a lower
value produces a mellower, softer sound.
Vib.Type Specifies the vibrato type (vibrato waveform). Sin*, Tri, Saw, Sqr
(Vibrato Type)
Setting Description Waveform
Sin Sine wave
Tri Triangle wave
Saw Sawtooth wave
Sqr Square wave
Vib.Depth Specifies how much vibrato is applied to a note. –64 to 0* to +63

(Vibrato Depth)
Vib.Rate Specifies the speed of the vibrato applied to a note. –64 to 0* to +63
(Vibrato Rate)
Vib.Delay Specifies how much time elapses until vibrato starts. –64 to 0* to +63
(Vibrato Delay)
Oct.Shift Shifts the pitch upwards or downwards in octave steps. –2 to 0* to +2
(Octave Shift)
Volume Specifies the volume level of all tones. A larger value sets a higher volume 0 to 127*
(Volume) level.
TouchSense Specifies how much the volume changes in accordance with the relative –64 to 0 to +63*
(Touch Sense) amount of pressure applied to keyboard keys. A larger positive value results
more change in volume in accordance with key pressure. A larger negative
values results in less change in volume in accordance with key pressure. Key
pressure does not affect volume when a value of 0 is set.
Rev.Send Specifies how much reverb is applied for each tone. 0 to 40* to 127
(Reverb Send)
Cho.Send Specifies how much chorus is applied for each tone. 0* to 127
(Chorus Send)
DSP On Off Specifies whether DSP should be applied (on) or not applied (oFF) to notes. oFF*, on
(DSP On/Off) The following four settings become enabled when “on” is selected for this
setting.
DSP Specifies the DSP to be applied to tones using DSP numbers (001 to 100: ton*, 001 to 200
Preset DSPs; 101 to 200: User DSPs). Selecting “ton” applies the initial preset
DSP of each tone.
DSP Type Shows the DSP type number corresponding to the above DSP value that is set 01 to 46*1
(DSP Type) automatically as the initial default setting.*1 You can modify the initial default
setting and select a different DSP type.
E-48

*2 *2
DSP Parameters 1 Shows up to eight parameters for “DSP Type”.
through 8
DSP RevSend Adjusts how much reverb is applied to the post-DSP note. 0 to 40* to 127
(DSP Reverb Send)
Mod Setting Assigns either vibrato or DSP to the S-2 (MODULATION) button. Vib*, DSP
(Modulation Setting)
Mod Depth When vibrato is assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) button, specifies the 0 to 127 (Default
(Modulation Depth) depth of vibrato applied to a tone while the button is depressed. setting depends on
the tone.)
Mod Button*3 Specifies the function assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) button when “DSP” oFF*, 1 to 8*4
(Modulation Button is selected for the “Mod Setting”. Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns
Assign) the corresponding DSP parameter (1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the
button when “oFF” is selected for this parameter.
Mod Button On Value*3 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) *5
(Modulation Button On button works while the button is depressed.

Value)
Mod Button Off Value*3 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the S-2 (MODULATION) *5
(Modulation Button Off button works while the button is released.

Value)
Rot Button*6 Specifies the function assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/FAST) button. oFF*, 1 to 8*4
(Rotary Button Assign) Specifying a value from 1 through 8 assigns the corresponding DSP parameter
(1 through 8). Nothing is assigned to the button when “oFF” is selected for this
parameter.
Rot Button On Value*6 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/ *7
(Rotary Button On Value) FAST) button works while the button is lit.
Rot Button Off Value*6 Specifies how the function currently assigned to the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/ *7
(Rotary Button Off Value) FAST) button works while the button is unlit.
*1 See “Preset DSP List” (page E-155) for information about the DSP types of each preset DSP.
*2 The number of DSP parameters, their content, and their setting ranges depend on the DSP type. For details, see “DSP Type
List” (page E-156) and “DSP Parameter List” (page E-157).
*3 Included in the “Mod Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Mod Button” and then press
the R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to
change.
*4 Setting range depends on the selected DSP type.
*5 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Mod Button” setting.
*6 Included in the “Rot Button” group. To change the settings of these parameters, move the 0 to “Rot Button” and then press the
R-16 (ENTER) button. Next, use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the parameter whose setting you want to change.
*7 Depends on the selected DSP type and the “Rot Button” setting.
B
E-49
Using Drawbar Organ Tones

R-14 R-16
C-8 R-13 R-12
D-2
D-1 D-3 D-4 - D-12 C-17 R-17
Your Digital Keyboard comes with drawbar organ tones built 2. Press the R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) button
in that you can use for mixing waveform ratios, just like a to select the drawbar organ tone group.
drawbar organ. The nine sliders, which correspond to
• This displays the screen of one of the drawbar organ
drawbars, can be used to change harmonic overtone level
tones. The level meter shows the harmonic overtone
settings and to create sounds by adding percussion and click levels for the foot “lengths” preset for the currently
sounds in real time as you play. A button is also provided to
selected drawbar organ tone.
switch the rotary effect between fast and slow.
You also can edit parameters that are unique to drawbar Foot “length” harmonic overtone levels (16' to 1')
organ tones to create and store your own original user
drawbar organ tones.
■ About the drawbars

The nine sliders from D-4 (16') through D-12 (1') perform the
role of the drawbars of a drawbar organ. Each slider is
assigned a harmonic overtone from 16' through 1'*.
3. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change

the number and select the tone you want.
• Selecting a tone changes the tone number and tone
name on the display, and also changes the level meter
D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12 to reflect the harmonic overtone levels for the selected
tone.
* The prime symbol (') following a value such as 16' • Tone numbers L:051 through L:100 are user drawbar
represents a “length” in feet. organ tones. See “Editing Drawbar Organ Tones” (page
E-52) for more information.
Playing with a Drawbar Organ 4. Now you can play on the keyboard using the
Tone tone you selected.
• You can adjust the harmonic overtone levels of drawbar
organ tones in real time as you play. See “Adjusting a
To select and play with a drawbar organ tone Drawbar Organ Tone in Real Time” (page E-51) for
1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the more information.
number of the drawbar organ tone you want.
E-50 B
Adjusting a Drawbar Organ Tone in Real To configure the level meter to show the
Time harmonic overtone level of each slider
Use the sliders and buttons to adjust drawbar organ tones in position
real time.
1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure
To do this: Do this: under “To select and play with a drawbar organ
Adjust tone harmonic Shift sliders D-4 (16') through D-12 tone” (page E-50).
overtone levels (1') upwards and downwards. • The level meter shows the harmonic overtone levels for
• Shifting one of the sliders the foot “lengths” preset for the currently selected
upwards or downwards changes drawbar organ tone.
the harmonic overtone of the • You also could skip this step and start from step 2 of
corresponding foot “length” from this procedure, if you want.
its current level (the level preset
for the tone).*1 2. Hold down the R-12 (MANUAL) button until the
• You also can configure the level foot “length” values (16' through 1') along the
meter so it indicates the harmonic
top of the level meter flash twice. You can
overtone level of each slider
position. For more information, release the button at this time.
see “To configure the level meter • This will cause the level meter to indicate the current
to show the harmonic overtone positions of sliders D-4 (16') through D-12 (1'), and
level of each slider position” apply applicable harmonic overtone levels to the
(page E-51). current tone.
Add or remove Use the D-2 (PERCUSSION
percussion sound with SECOND) and D-3 (PERCUSSION
2nd overtone and 3rd THIRD) buttons.
overtone pitch to a • Each press toggles the button
tone between lit and unlit.
• The corresponding overtone
percussion is being applied to
notes while a button is lit, and not
being applied while it is unlit.
Switch the rotary Press the D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/
effect speed (rotation FAST) button.
speed)*2 • Each press toggles the button
between lit and unlit.
• Rotary speed is fast while the
button is lit and slow when it is
unlit.
*1 Adjustment to one of nine levels, from 0 to 8, is supported.

3. Shift sliders D-4 (16') through D-12 (1') upwards
Each level is indicated by the level meter as shown below. and downwards.
• When you do, the displayed harmonic overtone levels
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 will change accordingly in the level meter.
4. Now you can play on the keyboard using the

level-adjusted tone.
*2 This operation is supported only when DSP is being used

as the effect and the DSP type is “Rotary”. For details
about effects, see “Applying Effects to a Sound” (page
E-29). For details about DSP types, see “DSP Effect List”
(page E-155).
E-51
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required to configure

Editing Drawbar Organ Tones other parameters.
User Drawbar Organ Tone Numbers 6. To store a rhythm after you edit it, hold down
Tone areas numbered L:051 through L:100 are for storage of the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you press the
user drawbar organ tones. You can have up to 50 user C-17 (MENU) button.
drawbar organ tones stored in memory at one time. • This displays the drawbar edit menu.
You can recall a user drawbar organ tone by pressing the
R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN) button and then using the dial 7. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the tone number you • This displays a screen for specifying the destination
want. After recalling a user drawbar organ tone, you can user drawbar organ tone number and tone name.
perform the same operations as those supported for preset
drawbar organ tones. For more information, see “To select 8. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select
and play with a drawbar organ tone” (page E-50). the destination user drawbar organ tone
number you want.
To edit a drawbar organ tone and store it
1. Select the drawbar organ tone you want to edit. cursor to the name character position you want
• Perform the procedure under “To select and play with a to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
drawbar organ tone” (page E-50).
• At this point, you can perform operations with sliders
D-4 (16') through D-12 (1'), and the D-2 • For details about the characters you can input, see
(PERCUSSION SECOND) and D-3 (PERCUSSION “Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).
THIRD) buttons before starting the tone editing • To input a space, press both of the R-14 (–, +) buttons
operation. For details about using the sliders and at the same time.
buttons, see “Adjusting a Drawbar Organ Tone in Real
Time” (page E-51) and “To configure the level meter to
show the harmonic overtone level of each slider • A message (Replace?) will appear asking if you want to
position” (page E-51). overwrite the data currently in the destination with the
new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to overwrite.
2. Press the C-8 (TONE EDITOR) button.
• This displays the drawbar editor screen. deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the
• You can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to scroll

between pages.

the parameter you want to change.
• For information about the operation and the setting
range of each parameter, see “Drawbar Organ Tone
Parameter Settings” (page E-53).
4. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change

the setting value.
returns a parameter to its initial default setting.
E-52
Drawbar Organ Tone Parameter Settings

The table below shows the parameters that can be configured on the drawbar editor screen.
Parameter Name Setting Setting Range
Ft16' to Ft1' Adjusts a tone’s foot “length” harmonic overtone levels (16' to 1'). 0* to 8
(Drawbar 16' to Drawbar 1')
Perc. 2nd When “on”, a percussion sound with 2nd harmonic (2nd) or 3rd harmonic oFF*, on
(2nd Overtone Percussion) (3rd) pitch is applied to notes.*1
Perc. 3rd oFF*, on
(3rd Overtone Percussion)
Perc.Decay Specifies the decay time of percussion sound. A larger value specifies a 000* to 127
(Percussion Decay Time) longer decay time.
On Click When “on”, a click is sounded when a note starts to sound. oFF*, on
(Key On Click)
Off Click When “on”, a click sound is added when a keyboard key is released. oFF*, on
(Key Off Click)
Type “Sin” (Sine) is a waveform that does not include noise, while “Vin” Sin*, Vin
(Wave Type) (Vintage) is a waveform that includes characteristic noise of an electric
organ.
Vib.Rate Specifies the speed of the vibrato applied to a note. 000 to 64* to 127
(Vibrato Rate)
Vib.Depth Specifies how much vibrato is applied to a note. 000* to 127
(Vibrato Depth)
DSP On Off For information about these parameters, see the items starting from “DSP On Off (DSP On/
to Off)” under “Tone Parameter Settings” (pages E-48 through E-49).
Rot Button Off Value
*1 Makes sustained tones more lively. A percussion sound is sounded at its strongest immediately after a keyboard key is
pressed, and then gradually decays in accordance with the “Perc.Decay” setting. Though keeping keyboard keys depressed
will continue to sound organ notes, only the percussion sound decays.
• While the drawbar edit screen is displayed, you can change the parameters of drawbar 16' through 1' using sliders D-4 (16')
through D-12 (1').
E-53
Music Presets
R-15
L-3 - L-8 R-1 - R-12
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
L-14 L-16 C-10 C-17

L-13 L-15 L-17 C-11 C-14
Using Music Presets To perform using a music preset

Music presets provide one-touch access to Auto 1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to find the
Accompaniment, tone, reverb, and other settings that are music preset you want to use, and note its
configured in accordance with preset chord progressions. A group and number.
total of 305 presets let you easily configure the keyboard for a
wide variety of different musical styles. Chord progressions 2. While holding down the L-6 ([D] WORLD/
include both short loops of a few measures that are great for
VARIOUS) button, press the L-7 ([E] PIANO
improvisation, as well as progressions for entire songs. Chord
progressions are also fun just to listen to. RHYTHMS) button.
In addition to built-in presets, you can create your own original
music presets (user presets). You can record chord
progressions up to 999 measures long, which provides plenty
of versatility for long songs.
Music presets are divided among six groups, each of which
corresponds to one of the RHYTHM buttons from [A] through
[F]. Groups [A] through [E] are built-in preset groups, while
• This displays the music preset screen like the one
Group [F] is the user preset group.
shown below.
Flashing
• The D indicator will be flashing on the display.

This indicates that play with a preset chord progression
is enabled.
• Depending on the music preset you selected, the
F, A, or other indicators may also be flashing
or displayed.
E-54
Music Presets
3. Use the buttons from L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/ 7. To stop playing, press the L-15 (SYNCHRO/
DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) to select a ENDING) button or the L-16 (START/STOP)
music preset group. button.
• The D indicator continues to flash on the display
even after you stop playing. Pressing the L-16 (START/
STOP) button at this time will restart Auto
Accompaniment play.
8. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the music

preset screen.
• You also can press the R-15 (EXIT) button while Auto
Accompaniment play is in progress. In this case, play
• The L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button is for the user will stop and the music preset screen will be exited as
preset group. For details, see “Creating a User Preset” soon as you press the R-15 (EXIT) button.
(page E-58).
4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to scroll • Instead of using the preset chord progression, you also can
through the music preset numbers until the one use the chord keyboard (page E-26) to play Auto
you want is displayed. Accompaniment chords, and you also can play with the
• Tone, rhythm, and other settings will be configured in rhythm only. For details, see “To change music preset Auto
accordance with the music preset you selected. For Accompaniment settings” (page E-57).
details about the settings that are configured by a • During play using a music preset, you can change tone,
music preset, see “Music Preset Settings” (page E-56). rhythm, tempo, mixer, effect, and other settings.
5. What you should do to start your performance

depends on the music preset you selected as
described below.
When the F, E, or H indicator is
flashing on the display:
3 The flashing indicator means that the Digital Keyboard
is in synchro standby. Press a key in the chord
keyboard to the left of the split point (page E-17). This
will start Auto Accompaniment play along with the
chord progression.
When the F, E, or H indicator is not

flashing on the display:
3 Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. This will start
Auto Accompaniment play along with the chord
progression.
6. Play the melody along with the Auto

Accompaniment.
• The preset chord progression repeats the same
pattern. The number of measures in the progression
depends on the music preset that is selected. Shorter
progressions are made up of two to four measures,
while longer are 30 to 40 measures long. For some
chord progressions, a fill-in pattern will be inserted
automatically at the end of a progression pattern.
• You can change to a different music preset while Auto
Accompaniment play is in progress, or after stopping
your performance in step 7, below. Perform steps 3 and
4 of this procedure to change to another music preset.
If you change to a different music preset while playing,
the change will be executed after playback reaches the
end of the measure you are in when you make the
change.
E-55
Music Presets
Music Preset Settings

The settings listed in the table below are recalled when a music preset is selected.
• Except for the chord progression, all of the settings can be modified after a music preset is selected. Refer to the information
noted in the “Go here for more information” column of the table for details about modifying a particular setting.
• Selecting a different music preset or exiting the music preset screen clears any modifications you make in the currently selected
preset. If you want to retain modified settings for later use, you can save them as a user preset. For details, see “Creating a User
Preset” (page E-58).
Setting Go here for more information
Tones for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts Layering and Splitting Tones (page E-15)
Layer on/off, split on/off
Octave shift for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts Using Octave Shift (page E-18)
Reverb on/off and type To add reverb to sounds (page E-31)
Auto harmonize tones Using the Mixer (page E-36), Part Parameters (page E-43)
Volume of the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, and auto
harmonize parts
Part on/off
Auto harmonize or arpeggiator on/off and type Using Auto Harmonize (page E-28), Playing Arpeggio Phrases
Automatically (Arpeggiator) (page E-23)
Arpeggiator hold, arpeggiator speed, arpeggiator part Function Menu Settings (page E-131)
Rhythm To change the rhythm while using a music preset (page E-57)
Synchro start type (normal, intro, variation) Playing an Auto Accompaniment (page E-24)
Tempo To change the tempo setting (page E-19)
Chord progression –
• If you change to a different music preset while a music preset is playing, changes in rhythm and tempo will be executed after the
measure you are in when you make the change is complete.
• Though you cannot modify the chord progression of a music preset, you can modify the preset chord progression and save it as
a user preset. For details, see “Creating a User Preset” (page E-58).
E-56
Music Presets
To change music preset Auto To change the rhythm while using a music
Accompaniment settings preset
While the music preset screen is displayed, you can use the While the music preset screen is displayed, buttons L-3 ([A]
L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button to change Auto POPS/ROCK/DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) function
Accompaniment settings. as music preset group select buttons. Because of this, you
need to perform the procedure below to change the rhythm.
1. Press the R-17 (y) button twice.

• This displays a rhythm selection screen like the one
shown below.
• Each press of the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button cycles

through settings as shown below.
Setting D indicator
Preset chord progression Flashing 2. Use the buttons from L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/
DANCE) to L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) to select a
rhythm group.
Normal Auto Accompaniment
(Accompaniment Off)
Not displayed 3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to scroll
through the rhythm numbers until the one you
want is displayed.
Normal Auto Accompaniment

Displayed 4. After selecting the rhythm you want, press the
(Accompaniment On)
R-15 (EXIT) button or press the R-17 (t) button
twice.
• This exits the rhythm selection screen.
• When a preset chord progression or accompaniment off is
selected, the keyboard can be used for melody play. When
accompaniment on is selected, the left side range of the
• Pressing a button from R-1 ([A] PIANO) through R-12 ([L]
keyboard is the chord keyboard, and the right side range is
DRAWBAR ORGAN) while a music preset is in use will
the melody keyboard.
display the tone selection screen. While the tone selection
screen is displayed, pressing the R-17 (y) button once will
change to the rhythm selection screen shown in the
procedure above.
E-57
Music Presets
5. You can change each of the parameters on the

Creating a User Preset parameter menu as required.
(1) Use the R-17 (t, y, u, i) buttons to move the 0
User Preset Numbers to the parameter you want to change.
Preset areas numbered F:001 through F:100 are for storage setting value.
of user presets. You can have up to 100 user presets stored in • Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time
memory at one time. You can recall a stored user preset after returns a parameter to its initial default setting.
pressing the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button. See “To • The following explains the meanings and setting
perform using a music preset” (page E-54) for more ranges of the on-screen items. The settings marked
information. with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column
are initial defaults.
To create and save a user preset
Setting
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform Item name Description
Range
using a music preset” (page E-54) and select Synchro Specifies the Auto oFF, Normal*,
the music preset you want to edit in order to (Synchro type) Accompaniment synchro Variation,
create your user music preset. start standby type. Intro
IntroChd Specifies the chords of the C* - B,
2. Configure tone and other settings referring to (Intro chord) Auto Accompaniment intro Cm - Bm
“Music Preset Settings” (page E-56). pattern.
3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) EndingChd Specifies the chords of the C* - B,
(Ending chord) Auto Accompaniment Cm - Bm
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button. ending pattern.
• This displays the MP (music preset) editor screen like
the one shown below. AutoFill Specifies whether a fill in on*, oFF
(Auto fill in) should be inserted (on) or
not inserted (oFF) at the
end of the chord
progression.
Timing Specifies the chord change Normal*, Half,
(Timing set) timing during playback for Double, 3/4,
recorded chords. For 3/2
information about
differences in playback for
each setting value, see
• Pressing the R-16 (ENTER) button here will change to “Timing Setting and Chord
a screen for editing the chord progression. See “Editing Progression Playback”
a Chord Progression” (page E-62) for more information. (page E-60).
4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to (3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) as required.
“Parameter” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) (4) After the settings are the way you want, press the R-15
button. (EXIT) button.
• This displays the parameter menu. • This returns to the MP editor screen.
E-58
Music Presets
6. Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to

“Store” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button in place of step 6 displays
button. the confirmation screen shown below. Pressing the R-14
• This displays a screen for specifying the destination (YES) button at this time will display the user preset save
user preset number and name. screen in step 6.
Save destination user preset number

User preset name
To clear user preset data

destination user preset number you want. 1. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display
the MP (music preset) editor screen.
to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) 2. Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to
buttons to select the character you want. “Clear” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
• For details about the characters you can input, see button.
“Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).
• This displays a screen for specifying the number of the
user preset you want to clear.
at the same time.
9. After everything is the way you want, press the 3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the
number of the user preset you want to clear.
• This saves the data. 4. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• If the user preset number where you are saving the
data already has data saved to it, a message 5. In response to the “Sure?” message that
(Replace?) will appear on the display to confirm
whether you want to replace the existing data with the
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or
new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to replace the the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
existing data with the new data.

E-59
Music Presets
Timing Setting and Chord Progression Playback

This section explains how chord progressions are played in accordance with the “Timing” (Timing set) settings in step 5 under “To
create and save a user preset” (page E-58). Note that this setting affects playback only. It does not change the chord progression
data.
• Normal
Plays chords at the same timing as the recording.
• Half
Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is half that of the recording.
Example:
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Chord progression Dm A7 Dm G7 C EM7 Am C7
The following shows what happens when the “Half” setting is used to play back a user preset that was created based on a music
preset whose rhythm is a 4/4 time.
Half Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Half Playback when a 2/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
• Double
Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is double that of the recording.
Playing back a chord progression like that shown for “Half” above while “Double” is specified results in the progression shown
below.
Double Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Chord progression Dm Dm C Am
Double Playback when an 8/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset
Measure 1 2 3
Beat 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
Chord progression Dm A7 Dm G7 C
E-60
Music Presets
• 3/4
Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is 3/4 times that of the recording. This setting is best for use with a 6/8 time
rhythm.
Playing back a chord progression like that shown for “Half” above while “3/4” is specified results in the progression shown below.
3/4 Playback when a 4/4 time rhythm is assigned to the user preset
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
Chord progression Dm A7 Dm G7 C EM7 Am
• 3/2
Plays chords measure-by-measure at a timing that is 3/2 times that of the recording. This setting is best for use with a 6/4 time
rhythm.
Playing back a chord progression like that shown for “Half” above while “3/2” is specified results in the progression shown below.
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Measure 1 2 3 4
Beat 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
Chord progression Dm A7 Dm G7 C EM7 Am
• When “Double” or “3/2” is selected, chord timing is shifted to a later timing. Any chords that do not fit within a measure are not
played.
E-61
Music Presets
5. Perform the following chord progression

Editing a Chord Progression editing operations.
You can modify the preset chord progression and save it as a • Change an existing chord (“To modify recorded chord
user preset, or you can create a new chord progression from data”, page E-63)
scratch and save it. • Delete an existing chord (“To delete recorded chord
data”, page E-63)
Chord Progression Editing Flow • Insert a new chord (“To insert a new chord”, page E-63)
• Delete all existing chords (“Initialize”, under “To perform
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform menu operations”, page E-65)
• Input a series of chords (“To perform step input of
using a music preset” (page E-54) and select
chords”, page E-64)
the music preset you want to edit in order to • Key shift all existing chords (“Key Shift”, under “To
create your user music preset. perform menu operations”, page E-65)
• Insert another music preset chord progression following
2. Configure tone and other settings referring to the chord progression data of the preset being edited
“Music Preset Settings” (page E-56). (“AppendChord”, under “To perform menu operations”,
page E-65)
3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) • Delete existing chords in a specific measure (“Delete
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button. Measure”, under “To perform menu operations”, page
• This displays the MP (music preset) editor screen like E-65)
• Insert blank measures at a specific location (“Insert
the one shown below with the 0 next to “Chord Edit”.
Measure”, under “To perform menu operations”, page
E-65)
6. After editing is complete, press the R-15 (EXIT)

button.
• This returns to the MP editor screen.
7. Perform steps 4 through 9 under “To create and

save a user preset” (page E-58).
• Steps 4 and 5 can be skipped if they are not necessary.

• This displays the chord editor screen shown below. You
can use this screen to directly edit the individual chord
data items of a chord progression.
Data type name at

Data being edited cursor position
Cursor
Data before and after data being edited
E-62
Music Presets
To modify recorded chord data To delete recorded chord data

1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure 1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure
under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on
page E-62. page E-62.
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
cursor to the chord you want to edit. cursor to the chord you want to delete.
• You can use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)
buttons to move the cursor by measure-by-measure. 3. Press the C-10 (DELETE) button.
• The chord at the current cursor position will be deleted
3. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the as soon as you press the C-10 (DELETE) button.
cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
buttons to change the value at the cursor
position. • You cannot delete the first chord of the user preset
• The cursor flashes during a value change operation. data.
Chord root
To insert a new chord
Measure:Beat:Tick Chord type
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure
under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on
page E-62.
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the

cursor to the chord that comes immediately
before the position where you want to insert a
chord.
Cursor 3. Press the C-11 (INSERT) button.
• A “tick” is a time unit that is shorter than one beat. With • This displays a screen like the one shown below.
music preset data, 12 ticks equal one beat. This means
that you can specify a tick value in the range of 00 to
11. A tick value of 12 advances to the next beat. In the
case of 4/4 time, a quarter note (2) is 12 ticks and an
eighth note (6) is 6 ticks.
Chord progression
Measure 1 Measure 2
Beat 1 Beat 2 Beat 3 Beat 4 Beat 1 Beat 2
Tick 00 01 02 09 10 11
001:1:00 002:1:00
For the sample display above, the chord
change from C to Bm occurs here.
4. To apply the changed value, press the R-16

(ENTER) button.
• This causes the cursor to stop flashing.
• You cannot change the timing (Measure:Beat:Tick) of

the first chord of the user preset data.
E-63
Music Presets
4. Specify the location of the new chord insert as a To perform step input of chords
number of beats after the current cursor
position. 1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure
under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on
To specify this number of beats
Press this button: page E-62.
after the current cursor position:
4 beats R-1 (5) 2. Press the C-14 (STEP) button.
2 beats R-2 (1) • This will display a step screen like the one shown
below.
1 beat R-3 (2)
1/2 beat R-7 (6)
1/4 beat R-8 (7)
• Except for the R-8 (7) button, pressing the R-4 ( • )

button after you press any one of the above buttons will
increase number of beats by 1.5.
• Pressing the R-10 (,) button after you press any one
of the above buttons will change the number of beats
by 2/3.
• The R-9 (8) and R-11 (.) buttons are disabled
during this step. 3. Use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)
buttons to move the cursor to the location from
5. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. which you want to perform step input.
• This inserts the chord and causes the cursor to appear • The cursor will move in one-measure steps.
at the “ROOT” position of the inserted chord data. The
initial default root setting is C. 4. Specify the length of the chord you want to
input.
• For information about how to do this, see the table in
step 4 under “To insert an event” (page E-94).
• The R-9 (8) button is disabled during this step. Also
note that you cannot specify a dotted 16th note.
5. Press the keyboard keys that correspond to the

chord you want to input.
• Press keyboard keys in accordance with the current
chord fingering mode. For details, see “Selecting a
6. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify Chord Fingering Mode” (page E-26).
• The chord is input as soon as you press the keyboard
the root.
key, and the cursor will move by the length you
7. Use the R-17 (i) button to move the cursor to specified in step 4 to the next measure:beat:tick. From
there you can input the next chord, if you want.
“TYPE” position, and then use the dial or R-14
(–, +) buttons to configure the type setting.
• When the cursor is located at “ROOT” or “TYPE”, you
• You cannot input more than 999 measures here.
can use the chord keyboard to specify the chord root or
type. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to input the chords you
8. To apply the chord data, press the R-16 want.
(ENTER) button. • If you want to input a series of chords of the same
length, skip step 4 and perform step 5 only.
7. When you are finished with step input, press
the R-15 (EXIT) button twice.
E-64
Music Presets
To perform menu operations *1 Deletes all existing chords, and replaces it with four
measures of data with a C-chord at the first beat of the first
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of the procedure measure (user preset initial data).
under “Chord Progression Editing Flow” on *2 You will not be able to execute this operation if the number
page E-62. of measures specified exceeds 999.
*3 You cannot delete all measures. If you specify range that
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) includes all of the measures, the first measure will remain
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button. without being deleted.

3. This displays a screen like the one shown appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute
below.
the operation you performed in step 4 or the
R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button starts the process. The
message “Please Wait” will remain on the display if the
process takes time to perform. Do not perform any
operation while this message is on the display.
4. Execute the desired menu operation.

To do this: Do this:
Delete all existing Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0
chords to “Initialize” and then press the R-16
(Initialize)*1 (ENTER) button.
Key shift all existing 1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
chords 0 to “Key Shift” and then press the R-16
(Key Shift) (ENTER) button.
2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
specify how much you want to shift the key.
• You can specify a value from –5 to +6.
Insert another music 1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
preset chord 0 to “AppendChord” and then press the
progression R-16 (ENTER) button.
following the chord 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to scroll
progression data of through the music preset numbers until the
the preset being one you want is displayed, and then press
edited the R-16 (ENTER) button.
(AppendChord)*2
Delete existing 1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
chords in a specific 0 to “DeleteMeas.” and then press the
measure R-16 (ENTER) button.
(Delete Measure)*3 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
specify the start measure of the delete
operation.
3. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the
thick brackets (%) to “Size”.
specify the number of measures you want
to delete.
5. After everything is the way you want, press
the R-16 (ENTER) button.
Insert blank 1. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
measures at a 0 to “InsertMeas.” and then press the
specific location R-16 (ENTER) button.
(Insert Measure)*2 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
specify the start measure of the insert
operation.
3. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the
thick brackets (%) to “Size”.
specify the number of measures you want
to insert.
5. After everything is the way you want, press
E-65
Saving Keyboard Setups to Registration Memory
L-1
R-14
C-10 C-12 C-15 C-17

C-11 C-13 C-14 C-16
Registration memory lets you store Digital Keyboard setups

(tone, rhythm, etc.) for instant recall whenever you need them.
• For information about items that can be part of a

registration setup, see “Parameter List” (page E-162).
• When recalling a registration setup, you can recall only the
setting items related to accompaniments, or only the setting
items related to scales. For more information, see C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16
“RegFltAcmp (Registration Filter: Accompaniment)” (page
E-132) and “RegFltScal (Registration Filter: Scale)” (page
E-132).
You can have up to 96 setups in registration memory at one Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Area 4 Area 5 Area 6
time. The C-10 (BANK) and C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) buttons are
used for selecting bank and area. Bank 1 Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6
Bank 2 Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup
2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
Bank 16 Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup Setup
16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6
• Each press of the C-10 (BANK) button cycles through the
bank numbers, from 1 to 16.
• Pressing a button from C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) selects the
corresponding area in the currently selected bank.
■ Registration Save Example

This example saves the data shown in the table below to the
following setups in Bank 1.
• Initial melody setup saved to Setup 1-1.
• Second melody setup saved to Setup 1-2.
• Third melody setup saved to Setup 1-3.
Setup 1-1 Setup 1-2 Setup 1-3
Tone Number E:016 H:001 A:001
Rhythm Number A:015 E:013 A:044
Tempo 080 140 089
E-66
Saving Keyboard Setups to Registration Memory
To save a setup to registration To recall a setup from registration

memory memory
1. Configure the tone, rhythm, and other settings 1. Press the C-10 (BANK) button to select the bank
you want to include in the setup. that contains the setup you want to recall.
2. Press the C-10 (BANK) button to select the bank 2. Use buttons C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) to select the
you want. area that contains the setup you want to recall.
• Each press of the C-10 (BANK) button cycles through • This will recall the registration memory setup and
the bank numbers. automatically configure the Digital Keyboard settings
accordingly.
Bank 2 selected
• While the “BANK” screen is displayed after pressing the Setup 6-1 recalled
C-10 (BANK) button, use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons
to select the bank you want.
• If you do not perform any operation for a few seconds,
• Notes currently being sounded by the keyboard may stop if
the display will return to previous screen automatically.
you recall a setup that causes a change in octave shift
3. While holding down the C-17 (STORE) button, (page E-18). To keep this from happening, either select a
setup that does not cause a change in the octave shift
press a button from C-11 (1) to C-16 (6) to select
setting, or hold down the pedal (which will cause notes
an area. currently being played to be sustained).
• This will save the settings you configured in step 1 into
the applicable setup.
• If there is anything already stored in the setup, it will be
replaced (deleted) with the new setup.
Registered as Setup 2-1

E-67
Using the Song Sequencer

C-3 C-4 R-15
C-7 R-1 - R-12
L-1
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
L-12 L-14 L-16 C-10 C-12 C-17

L-13 L-15 C-11 C-13 C-14
You can use the song sequencer to record keyboard play

(including Auto Accompaniment), or to record individual parts Starting One-touch Recording
(multi-track recording) and combine them into a final song. (EASY REC)
After recording data, you can edit each individual note (event).
You can have up to five recorded songs (approximately EASY REC lets you start recording of keyboard play with a
30,000 notes total) stored in memory at the same time. single button operation.
• The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display • EASY REC is a function of the song sequencer. For details
while a data save operation is in progress. Do not on using the song sequencer, see “What you can do with
perform any other operation while it is displayed. the song sequencer” (page E-70).
Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the • EASY REC can be used to record keyboard play that uses
memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be a music preset (page E-54). For details, see “To use EASY
deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the REC to record a performance using a music preset” (page
Digital Keyboard to fail to turn on when the L-1 E-70).
“Troubleshooting” (page E-150). To use EASY REC to record
1. Configure Digital Keyboard settings for your

performance.
• Configure the following settings: tone and rhythm
selection, tempo, layer and split, synchro standby
(when using Auto Accompaniment), mixer, etc. For
details about settings that can be configured, see
“Recording Start” under “System Track and Track 01
through 16 Common Recording Content” (page E-71)
and “System Track Recording Content” (page E-71).
• Performing step 2 below enters record standby. After
that, recording will start whenever you play something
on the keyboard. After step 2, take care that you do not
accidentally press a keyboard key and unintentionally
start recording.
E-68
2. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button. (4) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Precount”
and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to turn the
precount on or off.
Turing on the precount inserts a one-measure count
before the start of recording when you press the L-16
(START/STOP) button in step 4.
(5) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the menu.
• The button will start flashing and the EASY REC screen 4. Start playing something on the keyboard.
shown below will appear on the display.
• Recording starts automatically when you perform any
Song area number one of the following operations.
– Playing on the keyboard
– Pressing the L-12 (INTRO), L-13 (NORMAL/
FILL-IN), or L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button
– Pressing the L-16 (START/STOP) button. To input
one or more rests before starting recording, press the
L-16 (START/STOP) button to start recording, and
then start keyboard play at the point you want.
• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button
to change from flashing to lit. During recording, the
Arrows (e) will indicate all the parts in Group A. This indicates the
display will show the current measure (MEASURE) and
Digital Keyboard is currently in system track (page E-70) record
standby. beat (BEAT).
• PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) and pedal operations are
• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates also recorded.
that there is already data recorded in that area. • When recording reaches a point where there is less
Selecting a song area that already contains recorded than 100 notes of remaining memory capacity, the
data and starting a new recording will cause the current measure (MEASURE) and beat (BEAT) values
existing system track data to be deleted. will start flashing.
3. Perform the following steps to configure beat 5. To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/
and other settings. STOP) button.
(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button, • After recording stops, the initial song sequencer mode
press the C-17 (MENU) button. screen appears on the display.
This will display a menu like the one shown below,
with the 0 next to “Beat” (beat).
• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button to replay what you have just recorded. For
details about playing back recorded content, see
“Playing a Recorded Song” (page E-79).
(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to configure the
beat setting. 6. To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4
You can specify a beat setting of 2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to (SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)
16/8.
button.
(3) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to
“Metronome” and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to
turn the metronome on or off.
Turning on the metronome causes it to sound a count
during recording, but not during playback.
E-69
To use EASY REC to record a performance What you can do with the song
using a music preset
sequencer
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform The simplest use of the song sequencer is to record a
using a music preset” (page E-54). performance as you play it. For details, see “To use EASY
REC to record” (page E-68). Virtually everything you play on
2. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button. the keyboard can be recorded by the song sequencer.
You also can use the song sequencer to perform multi-track
recording of 17 different tracks and assemble them into a final
song. For example, you can first record a piano track, followed
by a bass track, then a guitar track or tracks that feature other
musical instruments.
• The button will start flashing and the EASY REC screen Songs, tracks, and parts
will appear on the display.
A single song can be made up of up to 17 tracks. The 17
3. Start to play something using a music preset. tracks are broken down as shown in the table below.
For details, see “To perform using a music Track
Part
Part Contents
Number
preset” (page E-54).
• This will start recording, along with Auto Auto Accompaniment (Auto
A04
harmonize tone)
Accompaniment in accordance with the preset chord
progression. A05 Keyboard (UPPER 1 part)
• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button A06 Keyboard (UPPER 2 part)
to change from flashing to lit. During recording, the A07 Keyboard (LOWER part)
Auto Accompaniment
beat (BEAT). A09
(Percussion part)
4. To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/ A10

Auto Accompaniment
(Drums part)
STOP) button. Auto Accompaniment
System A11
• After recording stops, the initial song sequencer mode Song Track (Bass part)
screen appears on the display. Auto Accompaniment
A12
• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP) (Chord 1 part)
button to replay what you have just recorded. For Auto Accompaniment
A13
details about playing back recorded content, see (Chord 2 part)
“Playing a Recorded Song” (page E-79). Auto Accompaniment
A14
(Chord 3 part)
5. To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4 Auto Accompaniment
A15
(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT) (Chord 4 part)
button. A16
Auto Accompaniment
(Chord 5 part)
Track 01 B01 Keyboard (B01 part)
Track 16 B16 Keyboard (B16 part)
• The Digital Keyboard uses multiple parts simultaneously to

sound Auto Accompaniment, a keyboard layer tone, and
keyboard split tone at the same time. The system track is
used to record the notes of these parts in a single location.
• Tracks 01 through 16 each correspond to a single musical
instrument part. Each track is used to record the notes of
each individual part.
• The parts shown in the table above correspond to mixer
parts. For details, see “Using the Mixer” (page E-36).
• Part B10 is a drum sound only part.
E-70
System Track and Track 01 through 16

Common Recording Content • Due to the way song parts are configured, settings
configured by a recalled registration are applied to different
■ Recording Start numbered parts than they were assigned to when the setup
• Beat setting was saved, as shown below.
• Rhythm selection
• Tempo setting Parts when registration Parts when registration is
• Scale setting setup is saved recalled for song recording
• The mixer settings below UPPER 1 part (A01) UPPER 1 part (A05)
– All part parameters from A04 through A07 and B01
UPPER 2 part (A02) UPPER 2 part (A06)
through B16 (Excluding part on/off)
– Part parameters from A09 through A16: part on/off, LOWER part (A03) LOWER part (A07)
coarse tune, fine tune, scale enable, DSP line Auto Harmonize tone part Auto Harmonize tone part
– DSP parameters: volume, pan, reverb send (A04) (A04)
• Effect settings
• Accomp volume For details about the configuration of song parts, see
“Songs, tracks, and parts” (page E-70).
■ During Recording • The moment you call up a registration setup or One Touch
• Keyboard play Preset while recording, the setting information registered
• Pitch bender operations with the registration setup or One Touch Preset is recorded
• Pedal operations to the system track. The registration setup or One Touch
• The button operations below Preset itself is not recorded.
S-2 (MODULATION), D-1 (ROTARY SLOW/FAST),
D-2 (PERCUSSION SECOND),
Track 01 through 16 Recording Content
D-3 (PERCUSSION THIRD)
• D-4 (16') through D-12 (1') slider operations
■ Recording Start
• Part tone selection for the track
System Track Recording Content
■ During Recording
■ Recording Start • Part tone selection for the track
• Tones for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts • The mixer settings below
• Layer and split on/off – All part parameters from B01 through B16
• Split point setting (except part on/off)
• Octave shift for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts
• The function menu item settings below (page E-131)
Panel Settings and Header Settings
– Arpeggiator hold, arpeggiator speed, arpeggiator part
• Auto harmonize or arpeggiator on/off and type Before starting recording with the song sequencer, you need
• Synchro standby (Normal, Variation, Intro) to select the tone and rhythm, and also configure other
• Music preset (Only when using EASY REC.) settings such as tempo, mixer settings, etc. These are called
“panel settings” because they are configured using the Digital
■ During Recording Keyboard’s control panel. When you start recording, panel
• Rhythm selection settings are stored in the header of the song. Settings in the
• Tempo setting header of a song are called “header settings”.
• All of the items under “Recording Start” above, except for • The “Recording Start” settings under “System Track and
the function menu item settings and split point setting Track 01 through 16 Common Recording Content” (page
• Chord play using the chord keyboard E-71), “System Track Recording Content” (page E-71) and
• The rhythm controller operations below “Track 01 through 16 Recording Content” (page E-71) are
L-12 (INTRO), L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN), stored as header settings.
L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN), and L-15 (SYNCHRO/ • Only header settings can be changed after song recording
ENDING) button operations is complete. For details, see “Using Panel Record to
• Settings recalled from registration memory Rewrite Song Header Settings” (page E-78).
• Settings recalled using One Touch Preset
E-71
4. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

Recording Individual Tracks system track.
This section explains how to record to the system track and • If the system track already contains recorded data,
how to record to Tracks 01 through 16. For details about track starting recording in step 7 below will cause the current
configuration and what is recorded to each track, see “What system track data to be deleted.
you can do with the song sequencer” (page E-70).
To record a performance to the system track
1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to

enter the song sequencer mode.
5. Configure panel settings as required for your

performance.
• Configure the following settings: tone and rhythm
Song area number selection, tempo, layer and split, synchro standby
(when using Auto Accompaniment), mixer, etc. For
details about settings that can be configured, see
“Recording Start” under “System Track and Track 01
through 16 Common Recording Content” (page E-71)
and “System Track Recording Content” (page E-71).
For information about mixer settings, see “Mixer
Settings in the Song Sequencer Mode” (page E-76).
6. Perform the following steps to configure beat

• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates and other settings.
that there is already data recorded in that area. (1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,
• L in the level meter indicates that the system track is press the C-17 (MENU) button.
currently selected, while M indicates that another track This will display a menu like the one shown below, with
(01 through 16) is selected. In the case of M, a pointer the 0 next to “Beat” (beat).
(e) indicates which track is selected.
• A black box ( ) in the level meter above a track
number indicates that there is already data recorded in
that track.

song area number.
• Selecting a song area that already contains recorded
data will immediately recall the header settings of the
song (page E-71).
(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to configure the
3. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button. beat setting.
You can specify a beat setting of 2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8.
Turning on the metronome causes it to sound a count
• The button will start to flash and the Digital Keyboard (4) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Precount”
will enter record standby, which means recording will and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to turn the
start whenever you play something on the keyboard. precount on or off.
Up to step 7, take care that you do not accidentally Turing on the precount inserts a one-measure count
press a keyboard key and unintentionally start before the start of recording when you press the L-16
recording. (START/STOP) button in step 7.
E-72
To record to Tracks 01 through 16

• Page 2 of the menu screen has a “RecType” setting, but
this setting cannot be used when recording a performance
to the system track. enter the song sequencer mode.
7. Start playing something on the keyboard.

• Recording starts automatically when you perform any
one of the following operations.
– Playing on the keyboard
– Pressing the L-12 (INTRO), L-13 (NORMAL/
FILL-IN), or L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button Song area number
– Pressing the L-16 (START/STOP) button. To input
one or more rests before starting recording, press the
L-16 (START/STOP) button to start recording, and
then start keyboard play at the point you want.
• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button
to change from flashing to lit. During recording, the
beat (BEAT).
• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates
also recorded.
that there is already data recorded in that area.
• When recording reaches a point where there is less
• L in the level meter indicates that the system track is
than 100 notes of remaining memory capacity, the
currently selected, while M indicates that another track
current measure (MEASURE) and beat (BEAT) values
(01 through 16) is selected. In the case of M, which
will start flashing.
track is selected is indicated by the position of a pointer
8. To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/ (e).
• A black box ( ) in the level meter above a track
STOP) button.
number indicates that there is already data recorded in
• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP) that track.
details about playing back recorded content, see 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a
song area number.
9. To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4 • Selecting a song area that already contains recorded
data will immediately recall the header settings of the
(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)
song (page E-71).
button.
3. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.
• The button will start to flash and the Digital Keyboard

will enter record standby, which means recording will
start whenever you play something on the keyboard.
Up to step 7, take care that you do not accidentally
press a keyboard key and unintentionally start
recording.
E-73
4. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select a track (5) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “RecType”,
(Track 01 through Track 16). and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select “REPL”
or “OVDB”.
When you want to perform this type Select this

of recording: RecType option:
Delete any data currently existing in REPL (Replace)
the track being recorded to and start a
new recording.
Overdub any data currently existing in OVDB (Overdub)
the track being recorded to with the
5. Configure panel settings as required for your new recording.
performance.
• Configure the following settings: tone selection, tempo,
mixer settings, etc. For details about settings that can
be configured, see “Recording Start” under “System 7. Start playing something on the keyboard.
Track and Track 01 through 16 Common Recording • This will start recording and cause the C-3 (RECORD)
Content”* (page E-71) and “Track 01 through 16 button to change from flashing to lit. During recording,
Recording Content” (page E-71). For information about the display will show the current measure (MEASURE)
mixer settings, see “Mixer Settings in the Song and beat (BEAT).
Sequencer Mode” (page E-76). • To input one or more rests before starting recording,
press the L-16 (START/STOP) button to start
* Excluding rhythm selection and accomp volume.
recording, and then start keyboard play at the point you
6. Perform the following steps to configure beat want.
and other settings. also recorded.
(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button, • When recording reaches a point where there is less
press the C-17 (MENU) button. than 100 notes of remaining memory capacity, the
This will display a menu like the one shown below, with current measure (MEASURE) and beat (BEAT) values
the 0 next to “Beat” (beat). will start flashing.
8. To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.
• At this time you can press the L-16 (START/STOP)
details about playing back recorded content, see
9. To exit the song sequencer, press the C-4

(SONG SEQUENCER) button or the R-15 (EXIT)
(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to configure the beat button.
setting.
You can specify a beat setting of 2/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8.
Turning on the metronome causes it to count a count
(4) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Precount”
and then use the R-14 (–, +) buttons to turn the
precount on or off.
Turing on the precount inserts a one-measure count
before the start of recording when you press the L-16
(START/STOP) button in step 7.
E-74
To clear the content of a single track To clear a single song immediately after
immediately after recording it recording it
1. While the song sequencer mode initial screen is 1. While the song sequencer mode initial screen is
on the display after track recording is complete, on the display after track recording is complete,
hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you
press the C-17 (MENU) button. press the C-17 (MENU) button.
• This displays the song sequencer menu with the 0 • This displays the song sequencer menu.
located at “ClearTrack”.
“ClearSong” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This causes the “Clear Song” screen to appear. At this
time the target song for the clear operation is the one
you just recorded.

• This will cause the confirmation message “Sure?” to
appear.
2. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. 4. Press the R-14 (YES) button to clear the track
• This causes the “Clear Track” screen to appear. At this
time the target track for the clear operation is the one data or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
you just recorded.
3. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. • For information on how to select a particular song and clear
• This will cause the confirmation message “Sure?” to its content, see “To clear a song” (page E-82).
appear.
4. Press the R-14 (YES) button to clear the track

data or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
• For information on how to select a particular track and clear

its content, see “To clear a single track” (page E-85).
E-75
Mixer Settings in the Song Sequencer Mode Re-recording Part of a Song

You can access the mixer during playback, playback standby,
or record standby (C-3 (RECORD) button flashing), or while
(Punch-in Recording)
recording is in progress (C-3 (RECORD) button lit). Press the You can re-record parts of a song you previously recorded in
C-7 (MIXER) button to display the mixer screen. To return to order to correct errors, etc. Simply enter the record standby
the song sequencer mode screen, press the C-7 (MIXER) mode and play back the previously recorded song (punch-in
button again or press the R-15 (EXIT) button. playback) and then play the new notes when playback
reaches the location of the part you want to change.
The table below shows how mixer parts correspond to song
Mistake
sequencer parts.
Mixer Song Sequencer Playback
Parts A04 to A07, A09 to A16 System Track

Parts B01 to B16 Tracks 01 through 16
Use punch-in recording to
Supported Mixer Operations during Playback or Playback re-record only this part.
Standby
All mixer settings can be configured during playback or
playback standby, subject to the following precautions.
• If you want to change mixer settings during playback To start re-recording from a particular
standby, change them after selecting the song you want to location during playback (Manual Punch-in)
play back. If you change mixer settings and then change
the song selection, the header settings of the newly 1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to
selected song will be recalled and mixer settings will be enter the song sequencer mode.
changed accordingly.
• The only mixer settings you can change during playback 2. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a
standby are those that are included in the song header of
song area number.
the currently selected song. If mixer settings were changed
part way through when recording the song, the later
recorded mixer settings will supersede any settings you
3. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button to enter record
make during playback standby. standby.
• This causes the button to start flashing.
Supported Mixer Operations during Record Standby
The mixer settings for the parts shown below (excluding part 4. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track
on/off) are supported, depending on the track being recorded you want to partially re-record.
to. Settings are recorded to the header settings (page E-71),
the same way settings are stored when recording is started. 5. Hold down the C-3 (RECORD) button until the
punch-in/punch-out screen shown below
System Track Tracks 01 through 16
appears.
A05 (UPPER 1), A06 (UPPER 2), Parts corresponding to
A07 (LOWER), A04 (Auto each track
harmonize) parts (B01 through B16)
Supported Mixer Operations During Recording

Mixer settings cannot be configured during recording to the
system track.
Configuration of mixer settings (except for part on/off) is
supported for a part (B01 through B16) that corresponds to a
track when recording to any track from 01 through 16 shown.
Any change in a mixer setting on the mixer screen is recorded
as soon as it is made.
For details about mixer functions and operations, see “Using

the Mixer” (page E-36).
E-76
6. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. To specify the punch-in recording range
• This starts punch-in playback.
before starting (Auto Punch-in)
• The following operations are supported during punch-in
playback. They help you move to the re-recording start 1. Play the song and determine what part of what
point quickly and easily.
track you want to re-record.
To do this: Do this: • For details about play back, see “Playing a Recorded
Fast Forward Hold down the L-14 (dFF) button. Song” (page E-79).
• You can specify a specific measure, beat, and tick* for
Fast Backward Hold down the L-13 (sREW) the start point and the end point of the range to be
button. re-recorded. Normally, it is probably best to specify the
Pause Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button. start of a measure or beat as the start point and end
point. If you want to specify specific ticks, you can
Restart paused Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.
display the track to be re-recorded on the event editor
playback. screen and determine the desired location there. For
details about event editing, see “Editing Events” (page
7. When playback reaches the point from which E-87).
you want to start re-recording, start playing * For details about ticks, see “Reading Event Data”
(page E-88).
something on the keyboard.
• Punch-in recording starts the moment you start to play 2. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button to enter record
something on the keyboard. standby.
• Any one of the following also will start punch-in
• This causes the button to start flashing.
recording: a pedal or pitch bender operation; changing
the tone setting; changing the rhythm, or tempo 3. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track
setting*.
* System track only
you want to partially re-record.
• To start punch-in recording without making any change
in the notes played or the settings used, press the C-3
4. Hold down the C-3 (RECORD) button until the
(RECORD) button. punch-in/punch-out screen appears. You can
• Starting recording will cause the C-3 (RECORD) button release the button at that time.
to light.
5. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select
“Auto” for the “Mode” setting.
• If you want to delete all of the data in the track following the • This displays a range specification screen like the one
section you just re-recorded with punch-in recording, press shown below.
the C-3 (RECORD) button in place of the L-16 (START/
STOP) button in step 8.
• If you want to cancel punch-in recording and retain the
original track data, hold down the C-3 (RECORD) button
until it becomes unlit.
8. To stop recording, press the L-16 (START/

STOP) button.
• This will end punch-in recording and cause the C-3
(RECORD) button to become unlit.
• Any previously recorded data in the track that comes
after the point you stopped punch-in recording will
remain in the track.
E-77

cursor, use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to Using Panel Record to Rewrite
change the value at the cursor position, and Song Header Settings
then press the R-16 (ENTER) button. The header of each song contains “header settings”, which
• If you have already specified a range using the locator are settings that were in effect on the Digital Keyboard when
screen (page E-80), you can copy that range to this recording was performed. You can use a “panel record”
screen by holding down the L-12 (REPEAT) button. operation to rewrite a song’s header settings with the Digital
Keyboard’s current setup.
The following items are header settings that can be rewritten
using the panel record operation.
• Rhythm selection
• Tempo setting
• Scale setting
• The mixer settings below
– All part parameters from A04 through A07 and B01
through B16 (Excluding part on/off)
– Part parameters from A09 through A16: part on/off,
Recording start point Recording end point
coarse tune, fine tune, scale enable, DSP line
– DSP parameters: volume, pan, reverb send
• Effect settings
7. After specifying the recording start point and • Accomp volume
end point, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. • UPPER 1 part tone, UPPER 2 part tone, and LOWER part
• This starts punch-in playback. You can perform fast tone selections
forward and fast backward operations during punch-in
playback using the operations described in step 6 To perform a panel record operation
under “To start re-recording from a particular location
during playback (Manual Punch-in)” (page E-76). 1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to
• You can start punch-in playback from one measure enter the song sequencer mode.
prior to the current recording start point by pressing the
L-12 (REPEAT) button which causes the ?
indicator to appear on the display.
8. When playback reaches the re-record point you

specified, start playing something on the
keyboard.
• Punch-in recording will start automatically when 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select a
playback reaches the record start point you specified. song area number.
The C-3 (RECORD) button will light when recording
starts. 3. Configure panel settings so they reflect the
• Recording stops and punch-in recording is exited
settings you want to write as the header
automatically when the record end point you specified
is reached. At this time the C-3 (RECORD) button will settings.
become unlit. • You can configure the following settings: mixer settings,
• If you want to stop recording before the record end tempo, system track rhythm, track tone selection, etc.
point you specified is reached, press the L-16 (START/ • To change the system track UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and
STOP) button. Any previously recorded data in the LOWER part tones or mixer settings, use the mixer to
track that comes after the point you stopped punch-in change the settings of parts A05 (UPPER 1), A06
recording will remain in the track. (UPPER 2), and A07 (LOWER).
• When “EOT” (End of Track) is selected for the
recording start point, the start point for punch-in 4. After all of the panels settings are the way you
recording is the end of the track. want, hold the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you
• When “OFF” is selected for the recording end point, press the C-17 (MENU) button.
punch-in recording will not stop automatically because • This displays the song sequencer menu.
no end point is specified. To stop punch-in recording in
this case, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.
E-78
5. Use the R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to 4. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.
“PanelRecord”. • This starts playback. The following operations are
supported during playback.
To do this: Do this:
Fast forward Hold down the L-14 (dFF) button.
Fast backward Hold down the L-13 (sREW) button.
Pause Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.
playback
Perform repeat Perform steps 3 through 5 under “To
6. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. playback repeat play a specific section of a
song” (page E-144).
7. In response to the “Sure?” message that • Even while playback is paused, you can still perform
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute fast forward playback by holding down the L-14
the panel record operation or the R-14 (NO) (dFF) button or fast backward playback by holding
button to cancel. down the L-13 (sREW). Releasing either button goes
back into pause.
• While playback is in progress or playback standby, you
Playing a Recorded Song can use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track
you want. Playing keyboard keys sounds the parts that
This section explains how to perform the following operations correspond to the currently selected track (A04 to A07
on songs recorded in the song sequencer mode. for the system track).
• Play a song. • Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end
• Fast forward, fast backward, pause, unpause. of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the
• Play a specific part in a song. L-16 (START/STOP) button.
• Repeat play a specific section of a song.
• Assign a name to a song.
• Delete a song.
To play a recorded song


song area number.
3. Configure mixer settings, tempo, and other

panel settings you want to use for playback.
• To change the system track UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and
LOWER part tones or mixer settings, use the mixer to
change the settings of parts A05 (UPPER 1), A06
(UPPER 2), and A07 (LOWER).
• The above settings are not required if you want to play
the song as it was recorded.
E-79
To play back a particular part alone To repeat play a specific phrase

1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to 1. Hold down the L-12 (REPEAT) button until the
enter the song sequencer mode. locator screen shown below appears on the
display.
song area number.
3. Press the C-7 (MIXER) button to display the

mixer screen.
4. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the part

you want to play (A04 through A16, B01 through
B16).
• For example, to play only the melody that was recorded
using the UPPER 1 part and recorded into the system Start point input area End point input area
track, select part A05. For details about the content of
each part, see “How Parts are Organized” (page E-36).
2. Specify a measure as the start point of the
5. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the thick phrase to be repeat played.
brackets (%) to “Part”. (1) Press the R-14 (+) button.
This will input “001:01:00” into the start point input area
(A), and cause the cursor to start to flash.
(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the start
measure number.
3. Specify a measure as the end point of the

phrase to be repeat played.
(1) Press the R-17 (i) three times to move the cursor to
the end point input area.
Press the R-14 (+) button.
The end point input area (B) initially shows the
6. Press the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time. measure that is one measure after the start point.
• This causes the setting to change to “Sol” (Solo).
(2) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the end
7. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. measure number.
• This starts playback only of the part you selected in
step 4.
• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end • This causes the cursor to stop flashing.
of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the
L-16 (START/STOP) button.
5. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the locator
screen.
6. Perform the following steps to start phrase

repeat play.
(1) Press the L-12 (REPEAT) button.
This causes the ? indicator to appear on the
display.
(2) Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.
The specified phrase plays back in a loop.
E-80
7. To stop playback, press the L-16 (START/STOP)

button. Editing a Song
The following operations are supported during song editing.
• Deleting a specific song or all songs
• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button without pressing the R-16 • Copying a song from one area to another
(ENTER) button in step 4 above will cancel the phrase • Deleting specific measures from a song
setting operation and close the locator screen. • Inserting blank measures into a song
• The start point and end point specified on the locator • Extracting system track recorded content to track 04
screen by the above operation will be displayed as the through 07 or 09 through 16
initial default values when you display the screen of editing • Renaming songs
the next event.
– “To delete all events in a specific range of a track” (page To start a song editor operation
E-93)
– “To copy the events within a specific range to a desired 1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to
location” (page E-94) enter the song sequencer mode.
– “To quantize all note events within specific range of a
track” (page E-96) 2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
– “To delete all pitch bender events within a specific range
button, press the C-4 (EDIT) button to display
of a track” (page E-97)
This lets you repeat play and check the phrase so you can the edit menu.
perform the above operation to edit it.

“Song Edit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the song editor menu shown below.
E-81
To clear a song 4. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick
brackets (%) to “To”.
1. Perform the procedure under “To start a song
editor operation” on page E-81 to display the
song editor menu, with the 0 located at
“Clear”.

• This displays the “Clear Song” screen.

song area number you want to clear.
• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates
• An asterisk (*) next to a song area number indicates that there is already data recorded in that area.
that there is already data recorded in that area.
song area number you want to copy to.

• If the copy destination song area does not contain
recorded data, the copy operation is performed
immediately.
• If the copy destination song area already contains
recorded data, the confirmation message shown below
appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing
• You can select “All” here to clear all songs.
data.
the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
To copy a song from one area to another
1. Perform the procedure under “To start a song

editor operation” on page E-81 to display the Press the R-14 (YES) button to perform the copy
operation and overwrite the existing song or the R-14
song editor menu. (NO) button to cancel.
“Copy” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the “Copy Song” screen. At this time the
thick brackets (%) will be located at the “Copy”
setting.

song area number you want to copy from.
E-82
To delete one or more measures from a song To insert blank measures into a song
1. Perform the procedure under “To start a song 1. Perform the procedure under “To start a song
editor operation” on page E-81 to display the editor operation” on page E-81 to display the
song editor menu. song editor menu.
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to 2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
“DeleteMeas.” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) “InsertMeas.” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button. button.
• This causes “Delete Measure” screen to appear. At this • This causes “Insert Measure” screen to appear. At this
time the thick brackets (%) will be located at the time the thick brackets (%) will be located at the
“Measure” setting. “Measure” setting.
3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the 3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the
song measure you want to delete. song measure number from which you want the
insert to start.
4. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick
brackets (%) to “Size”. 4. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick
brackets (%) to “Size”.

number of measures you want to insert.
• For example, specifying 002 for “Measure” and 003 for
“Size” will insert three blank measures in front of song
measure 2.

number of measures you want to delete.
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to insert
6. After everything is the way you want, press the or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete
or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
E-83
To extract system track recorded content to 4. In response to the “Sure?” message that
track 04 through 07 or 09 through 16 appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to start
extraction or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
As explained in detail under “Songs, tracks, and parts” (page
E-70), the system track is an individual track, while the
keyboard play and Auto Accompaniment data are recorded To rename a song
individually to multiple parts (A04 through A07, A09 through
A16). The data of these parts is extracted to Tracks 04 1. Perform the procedure under “To start a song
through 07 and 09 through 16, with one part corresponding editor operation” on page E-81 to display the
individually to one track of data. This makes it easy to edit song editor menu.
each accompaniment part individually.
A04 B04
A05 B05 “Rename” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
A06 B06 button.
A07 B07 • This displays the “Rename” screen.
A09 B09
A10 B10
System Track
A11 B11
A12 B12
A13 B13
A14 B14
A15 B15
A16 B16
• Performing this operation will delete all data currently

recorded in the system track, except for rotary effect 3. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the
speed ON/OFF data and tempo data. cursor to the name character position you want
• Performing this operation deletes all data currently to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
recorded in Tracks 04 through 07 and 09 through 16,
and overwrites it with the data in the system track.
1. Perform the procedure under “To start a song information about the characters you can input for the
name.
editor operation” on page E-81 to display the
song editor menu. at the same time.
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to 4. After everything is the way you want, press the
“Extract” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) R-16 (ENTER) button.
button.
• This displays an “Extract” screen like the one shown 5. In response to the “Sure?” message that
below. appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to rename
the song or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
E-84
Editing a Track To clear a single track

The following operations are supported during track (system 1. Perform the procedure under “To start a track
track, Tracks 01 through 16) editing. editor operation” on page E-85 to display the
• Clearing a single track track editor menu.
• Copying one track to another track (Tracks 01 through 16
only) 2. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• Combining two tracks into a single track (Tracks 01 through • This causes the “Clear Track” screen to appear.
16 only)
To start a track editor operation


the edit menu.
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to 3. Use the dial or R-17 (u, i) buttons to specify
“TrackEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) the track you want to clear.
• A black box ( ) above a track number in the level
button.
meter indicates that there is already data recorded in
• This displays the track editor menu shown below. that track.
• You also can select a track using the dial or R-14 (–, +)
buttons.

E-85
To copy one track to another track To combine two tracks into a single track
(Tracks 01 through 16 only) (Tracks 01 through 16 only)
1. Perform the procedure under “To start a track 1. In the song sequencer mode, use the R-17 (u,
editor operation” on page E-85 to display the i) buttons to select the lower numbered track
track editor menu. of those you want to combine.
• As an example, we will combine Track 03 and Track 05
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to into Track 06. Here, select Track 03.
button. 2. Perform steps 2 and 3 of the procedure under
• This causes the “Copy Track” screen to appear. At this “To start a track editor operation” on page E-85
time the thick brackets (%) will be located at the to display the track editor menu.
“Copy” setting.
3. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the “Merge” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
track number you want to copy from. button.
• This displays a “Merge Track” screen like the one
4. Press the R-17 (y) button to move the thick shown below. At this time the thick brackets (%) will
brackets (%) to “To”. be located at setting B.
• An asterisk (*) next to a track number indicates that
there is already data recorded in that track. A BC
track number you want to copy to.

• If the copy destination track does not contain recorded
data, the copy operation is performed immediately.
• If the copy destination track already contains recorded
data, the confirmation message shown below appears
A: One of the tracks to be combined (The track you
asking if you want to overwrite the existing data. selected in step 1 is the initial default selection).
B: Other track to be combined.
C: Destination track of combined tracks.
4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify 05

(Track 05) for B.
• Changing the value of B also causes the C value to
change.
Press the R-14 (YES) button to perform the copy 5. Press an R-17 (i or y) button to move the
operation and overwrite the existing track or the R-14 thick brackets (%) to C.
(NO) button to cancel.
6. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify 06
(Track 06) for C.
E-86
7. After everything is the way you want, press the To start an event editor operation
• If the destination track does not contain recorded data, 1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to
combination of the tracks starts immediately. enter the song sequencer mode.
• If the destination track already contains recorded data,
the confirmation message shown below appears asking 2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
if you want to overwrite the existing data. button, press the C-4 (EDIT) button to display
the edit menu.

• This displays the event editor screen shown below.
Press the R-14 (YES) button to perform the process and

overwrite the existing track or the R-14 (NO) button to
cancel.
• For information about how to use the event editor

• Performing the above procedure does not clear the screen, see “Event Types and Screen Content” (page
contents of the two source tracks. If you no longer need the E-88).
content of a track, you can clear it using the procedure
under “To clear a single track” (page E-85). 4. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.
Editing Events • This displays the event editor menu shown below.
The song sequencer records all Digital Keyboard operations

you perform while playing as “events”, which are the smallest
unit of data that makes up a song. Playing a single note on the
keyboard, for example, stores the following events: note start
measure, beat, and track, note pitch, note length, and note
intensity.
The following operations are supported during event editing.
• Deleting events
• Inserting events
• Copying events within a specific range to a desired location
• Next, select the menu item that corresponds to the type
• Quantizing* note events
of operation you want to perform. Details about each
• Deleting pitch bender events
operation are provided in the procedures of this section.
• Adjusting note event velocity values
• Adjusting note event gate time values
• Selecting the type of events that appear on the Event Editor
screen (View Select)
• Inserting or deleting beat events
• Directly inputting note events (step input)
* Quantize is an operation that automatically adjusts the
note-on timing of a note event to match a reference note.
E-87
The following explains the meaning of each screen position.

Event Types and Screen Content
Number Description
The event editor screen displays the individual events that
make up a song as values and characters as shown in the For all event types, indicates the even location
sample screen below. (timing) in the following format:
measure:beat:tick. A “tick” is a time unit that is
Event being edited (selected event) (Center of screen) 1 shorter than one beat. Song sequencer data uses
96 ticks per beat (for 2/4 to 8/4) or 48 ticks per
beat (for 2/8 to 16/8).
For almost all events, this position shows an
abbreviation indicating the event type. “Bend” in
display example (2) stands for “pitch bender
event”. Note events (display example (1)) and
chord events are different in that this position
2 shows the event parameter (note name for a note
event, root for a chord event) setting value.
Cursor (solid line) For information about what is displayed at this
Events before (previous event) and after position and the corresponding event type, see
(following event) the current event the “Event Data List” (page E-89).
The event editor screen shows three events at one time. The This position shows parameter setting values that
event in the middle line is the selected event. You can change corresponds to the event type. When an event
the value where the solid-line cursor is located. A broken line has multiple parameters, use the R-17 (u, i)
under a setting value indicates that the cursor can be moved 3 buttons to move the cursor, which will scroll the
to that value. display between the parameters. The name of the
parameter at the current cursor position will be
■ Reading Event Data displayed in position 4.
Here we will use two types of event displays to explain how to This position indicates where the cursor is
read event data. 4 currently located as “MEAS.” (measure), “BEAT”
• Example 1: Note event (beat), or “TICK” (tick).
1 2 4
Cursor 3
• Example 2: Pitch bender event
1 2 4
3
Cursor
E-88
■ Event Data List

The following table shows the event types that correspond to the abbreviations that appear on the display, as well as the
parameters of each event type and setting ranges.
• “2 display” and “4 display” in the table headings correspond to the 2, 4 screen positions under “Reading Event Data” (page
E-88).
• “2 display during insert” in the table headings indicates the event type name enclosed in thick brackets (%) when step 3 of
insert event procedure under “To insert an event” (page E-94).
System Track and Track 01 to 16 Common Events

Event Type 2 display during
insert 4 display Parameter Name Setting Range
2 display Event Name
TOP (song start point) – – – (Not editable)
NOTE Note name C- - C0 - G9*2
*1
Note [Note] GATE Gate time 00:00 - 99:95
VEL Velocity 001 - 127
Bend Pitch Bender [Bend] VALU Pitch Bender –8192 - 0000 - +8191
Mod Modulation*3 [Modulat] VALU Modulation 000 - 127
ModB Modulation Button [ModBttn] VALU Button On/Off on, oFF
RotB Rotary Slow/Fast Button [RotBttn] VALU Button On/Off on, oFF
END (song end point) – – – (Not editable)
*1 A note event is not displayed as the event name at position 2, but rather as the note name (C4, etc.).
*2 “C-” on the display indicates C-1 (one octave below C0).
*3 This event can be added only with the operation under “To insert an event” (page E-94). It applies vibrato.
Track 01 to 16 Events
TONE Part Tone [Tone] VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100
Sus Part Sustain Pedal [Sustain] VALU Part Sustain Pedal 000 - 127
Sost Part Sostenuto Pedal [Sostenu] VALU Part Sostenuto Pedal 000 - 127
Soft Part Soft Pedal [Soft] VALU Part Soft Pedal 000 - 127
Vol Part Volume [Volume] VALU Part Volume 000 - 127
Pan Part Pan [Pan] VALU Part Pan –64 - 00 - +63
CTun Part Coarse Tune [CrsTune] VALU Part Coarse Tune –24 - 00 - +24
FTun Part Fine Tune [FinTune] VALU Part Fine Tune –99 - 00 - +99
BndR Part Bend Range [BendRng] VALU Part Bend Range 00 - 24
RSnd Part Reverb Send [RevSend] VALU Part Reverb Send 000 - 127
CSnd Part Chorus Send [ChoSend] VALU Part Chorus Send 000 - 127
SclE Part Scale Enable [ScaleEn] VALU Part Scale Enable on, oFF
DspL Part DSP Line [DspLine] VALU Part DSP Line on, oFF
Exp Part Expression*4 [Express] VALU Part Expression 000 - 127
16, 5 1/3, 8, 4, 2 2/3, 2,
Ft. Feet
OrgB Drawbar Organ Drawbar [OrgnBar] 1 3/5, 1 1/3, 1
VALU Level 0-8
Drawbar Organ TYP Type 2nd, 3rd

OrgP [OrgnPrc]
Percussion VALU On/Off on, oFF
*4 This event can be added only with the operation under “To insert an event” (page E-94). It changes the volume.
E-89
System Track Events

TnU1 UPPER 1 Tone [Tone_U1] VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100
TnU2 UPPER 2 Tone [Tone_U2] VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100
TnLo LOWER Tone [Tone_Lo] VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100
TnHm Auto Harmonize Tone [Tone_Hm] VALU Tone Number A:001 - L:100
ROOT Root C-B
*1
Chord [Chord] TYPE Chord type *2
CVEL Chord velocity 000 - 127

RHY Rhythm [Rhythm] VALU Rhythm Number A:001 - F:100
Rctl Rhythm Controller [RhyCtrl] VALU Rhythm controller *3
PREC, DRUM, BASS,

Accompaniment Part PART Part
APrt [AcmpPrt] CHD1 - CHD5
On/Off
VALU On/Off on, oFF
Layr Layer On/Off [Layer] VALU Layer On/Off on, oFF
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Shft Octave Shift [OctShft] LOWR
VALU Octave Shift –2 - 0 - +2
Splt Split On/Off [Split] VALU Split On/Off on, oFF
TMPO Tempo [Tempo] VALU Tempo 30 - 255
SplP Split Point [SplitPt] VALU Split Point C- - C0 - G9*4
Auto Harmonize/ Auto Harmonize/
HmAp [HarmArp] VALU oFF, 001 - 162
Arpeggiator Arpeggiator
ApHd Arpeggiator Hold [ArpHold] VALU Arpeggiator Hold on, oFF
ApSp Arpeggiator Speed [ArpSpd] VALU Arpeggiator Speed 1, 2, 2S, 3, 4, 4S, 6, 8
ApPt Arpeggiator Part [ArpPart] VALU Arpeggiator Part U12, U1, U2, Low
Revb Reverb [Reverb] VALU Reverb oFF, 01 - 10
Chrs Chorus [Chorus] VALU Chorus 1-5
DSP DSP [DSP] VALU DSP ton, 001 - 200
NOTE Key C-B
Scal Scale [Scale]
Cent Cent –99 - 00 - +99
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Sus Part Sustain Pedal [Sustain] LOWR
VALU Part Sustain Pedal 000 - 127
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Sost Part Sostenuto Pedal [Sostenu] LOWR
VALU Part Sostenuto Pedal 000 - 127
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Soft Part Soft Pedal [Soft] LOWR
VALU Part Soft Pedal 000 - 127
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Vol Part Volume [Volume] LOWR
VALU Part Volume 000 - 127
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Pan Part Pan [Pan] LOWR
VALU Part Pan –64 - 00 - +63
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
CTun Part Coarse Tune [CrsTune] LOWR
VALU Part Coarse Tune –24 - 00 - +24
E-90

HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
FTun Part Fine Tune [FinTune] LOWR
VALU Part Fine Tune –99 - 00 - +99
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
BndR Part Bend Range [BendRng] LOWR
VALU Part Bend Range 00 - 24
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
RSnd Part Reverb Send [RevSend] LOWR
VALU Part Reverb Send 000 - 127
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
CSnd Part Chorus Send [ChoSend] LOWR
VALU Part Chorus Send 000 - 127
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
DspL Part DSP Line [DspLine] LOWR
VALU Part DSP Line on, oFF
AVol Accomp Volume*5 [AcmpVol] VALU Accomp volume 000 - 127
AScl Accomp Scale*6 [AcmpScl] VALU Accomp Scale on, oFF
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
LOWR
OrgB Drawbar Organ Drawbar [OrgnBar] 16, 5 1/3, 8, 4, 2 2/3, 2,
Ft. Feet
1 3/5, 1 1/3, 1
VALU Level 0-8
HARM, UPP1, UPP2,
PART Part
Drawbar Organ LOWR
OrgP [OrgnPrc]
Percussion TYP Type 2nd, 3rd
VALU On/Off on, oFF
*1 A chord event is not displayed as the event name at position 2, but rather as the chord root (C, etc.)
*2 See “Fingering Guide” on (page E-160).
*3 Intro: intro pattern, norml: normal pattern, Vari: variation pattern, nFlOn: normal fill-in on, nFloF: normal fill-in off,
vFlOn: variation fill-in on, vFloF: variation fill-in off, Endin: ending pattern.
*4 “C-” on the display indicates C-1 (one octave below C0).
*5 This setting corresponds to the function menu “AccompVol.” item (page E-133).
*6 For details, see “Specifying whether the Current Scale Settings Should be Applied to Auto Accompaniment (Accomp Scale)”
(page E-22).
To select a track for editing
1. Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure under “To start an event editor operation” on page E-87 to display
the event editor screen.
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button, use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the track you
want to edit.
E-91
To play back a song from the event editor 5. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to apply the
screen (Quick Play) settings and exit the “View Select” screen.
1. Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure under “To To edit an existing event

start an event editor operation” on page E-87 to
display the event editor screen. 1. Display the event editor screen of the track that
includes the event you want to edit.
2. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. • See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).
• This starts playback of the song being edited from the
first measure where the cursor is currently located. 2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end cursor to the event you want to edit.
of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the • You can use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)
L-16 (START/STOP) button. buttons to move the cursor by measure-by-measure.
To select the types of events that appear on 3. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the
the Event Editor screen (View Select) cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
1. Perform the procedure under “To start an event position.
editor operation” on page E-87. • The cursor flashes during a value change operation.
• During note event recording, you can change the pitch
2. Use R-17 (i) button to display page three of of a note by pressing a keyboard key. If the cursor is
the event editor menu, with the 0 located at located at the “VEL” position, the velocity value will
“ViewSelect”. change at the same time as the note pitch.
3. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. 4. To apply the changed value, press the R-16
• This displays the “View Select” screen. (ENTER) button.
To delete an individual event
1. Display the event editor screen of the track that

includes the events you want to delete.
• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).

cursor to the event you want to delete.
4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 3. Press the C-10 (DELETE) button.
between the setting items, and the dial or R-14 • The event at the current cursor position will be deleted
(–, +) buttons to toggle the currently selected as soon as you press the C-10 (DELETE) button.
setting between “on” (shown) and “oFF”
(hidden).
• The table below shows the event that corresponds to
each setting item.
Setting Item Corresponding Event
Note Note event
PitchBend Pitch Bend event
Pedal Sustain, soft, sostenuto events
Rhythm Rhythm event
Chord Chord event
Tempo Tempo event
Tone Tone event
Mixer Mixer event (excluding Tone event)
Others All other events besides those above.
• For information about each event, see “Event Types
and Screen Content” (page E-88).
E-92
To delete all events in a track 3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
1. Display the event editor screen of the track that the event editor menu.
• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91). 4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
“Delete” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button.
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display • This displays the “Delete” screen.
the event editor menu.
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Locator”.
“Delete” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) • This displays a range specification screen like the one
button. shown below.
• This displays the “Delete” screen. • If you have already specified a range using the locator
screen (page E-80), that range will be displayed on the
range specification screen.

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “All”, and Range start point Range end point
then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
5. In response to the “Sure?” message that 6. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel. buttons to change the value at the cursor
position.
• The event located at the timing specified by the range
To delete all events in a specific range of a
end point will not be deleted.
track
1. Display the event editor screen of the track that R-16 (ENTER) button.
• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91). 8. In response to the “Sure?” message that
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete
2. If required, you can perform a song playback or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
operation at this time to check the range you
want to select for deletion.
• See “To play back a song from the event editor screen
(Quick Play)” (page E-92).
E-93
To insert an event 5. After everything is the way you want, press the
1. Display the event editor screen of the track • This inserts the specified event.
where you want to insert the event.

cursor to the position where you want to insert
an event.
• The new event will be inserted at the same timing as
the event where the cursor is located. You can fine tune
the timing after inserting the new event.
3. Press the C-11 (INSERT) button. 6. Adjust the settings of the event as desired.
• This inserts the event at the specified location and
• Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the cursor, and
displays a screen like the one shown below.
then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
Note type (for note event only) value at the cursor position. The cursor flashes during a
value change operation.
• For information about data types and setting value
ranges for events that can be edited, see “Event Types
and Screen Content” (page E-88).
7. To apply the event data, press the R-16 (ENTER)

button.
Event type name • You also can perform the operation in step 3 by moving the
0 to “Insert” on the event editor menu and then pressing
4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to select an the R-16 (ENTER) button.
event type.
• For information about events that can be specified, see To copy the events within a specific range to
“Event Types and Screen Content” (page E-88). a desired location
• When a note event is specified as the event type,
specify the note type (note length) using the buttons 1. Display the event editor screen of the track that
shown in the table below. You specify the pitch of the contains the events you want to copy.
note in step 6 of this procedure. • See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91).
To specify this type of
note:
Press this button: 2. If required, you can perform a song playback
operation to check the range you want to select
Whole R-1 (5)
for copying and the copy location.
Half R-2 (1)
Quarter R-3 (2)
Eighth R-7 (6) 1 2
Sixteenth R-8 (7)
018:01:00 020:01:00 024:01:00
Thirty-second R-9 (8)
Dotted* R-4 ( • ) • See “To play back a song from the event editor screen
*
Triplet R-10 (,)
* For dotted notes and triplets, first select the note and then
add the dot or triplet. To specify a dotted quarter note, for
example, press the R-3 (2) button and then the R-4 ( • )
button.
E-94
3. Press the C-12 (COPY) button. To quantize an individual note event

• This displays the “Copy” screen.
• If you have already specified a range using the locator 1. Display the event editor screen of the track that
screen (page E-80), that range will be displayed on the includes the event you want to quantize.

cursor to the event you want to quantize.
3. Press the C-13 (QUANTIZE) button.

• This displays the “Quantize” screen.
2 Copy destination point

1 Copy source range (start point - end point)

position. 4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Cursor”.
R-16 (ENTER) button. 5. Specify the note you want to use as the
quantize reference note.
6. In response to the “Sure?” message that To specify this type of
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to copy or Press this button:
note:
Quarter R-3 (2)
• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button executes the copy
operation. The message “Complete” appears and the Eighth R-7 (6)
display returns to the “Copy” screen after the copy is Sixteenth R-8 (7)
complete.
Thirty-second R-9 (8)
• At this time, the “2 Copy destination point” value on
the locator screen moves forward by the length Triplet* R-10 (,)
specified by “1 Copy source range”.
* For a triplet, first select the note and then add the triplet. To
specify a triplet made up of quarter notes, for example,
1 2 press the R-3 (2) button and then the R-10 (,) button.
018:01:00 020:01:00 024:01:00 026:01:00 6. After everything is the way you want, press the
If you want to continue by copying the same copy • This performs quantization and returns to the event
source range to another location, repeat steps 5 and 6 editor screen.
again.
7. To return to the event editor screen, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button.
E-95
To quantize all note events in a track 4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Locator”.
1. Display the event editor screen of the track you • This displays a range specification screen like the one
want to quantize. shown below.
• See “To select a track for editing” (page E-91). • If you have already specified a range using the locator
2. Press the C-13 (QUANTIZE) button. range specification screen.

setting in the thick brackets (%) to “All”.
4. Perform step 5 under “To quantize an individual

note event” (page E-95).
5. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button when you

want to play back with quantization applied.
• Note that the actual data still has not been changed yet. Range start point Range end point

7. In response to the “Sure?” message that cursor, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to buttons to change the value at the cursor
quantize or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel. position.
To quantize all note events within specific 6. Perform step 5 under “To quantize an individual
note event” (page E-95).
range of a track
1. Display the event editor screen of the track that 7. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button when you
want to play back with quantization applied.
includes the events you want to quantize.
• Note that the actual data still has not been changed yet.
2. If required, you can perform a song playback 8. After everything is the way you want, press the
operation at this time to check the range you
want to select for quanitization. 9. In response to the “Sure?” message that
• See “To play back a song from the event editor screen appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to
quantize or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
3. Press the C-13 (QUANTIZE) button.
E-96
Deleting Pitch Bender Events ■ To delete all pitch bender events within a specific
range of a track
You can use the procedures in this section to delete all pitch
bender events from a track or from a specific range in a track. 1. Display the event editor screen of the track
whose pitch bender events you want to delete.
• To delete individual pitch bender events, perform the
operation under “To delete an individual event” (page 2. If required, you can perform a song playback
E-92). operation at this time to check the range you
• After deleting the pitch bender events in one track from
want to select for deletion.
Track 01 through Track 16, you can overdub new pitch
bender (PITCH BEND wheel (S-1)) operations for that • See “To play back a song from the event editor screen
track. To do so, use the procedure under “To record to (Quick Play)” (page E-92).
Tracks 01 through 16” (page E-73), and select “OVDB”
(Overdub) for the “RecType” setting in step 6-(5).
• Since “OVDB” cannot be selected for “RecType” when button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display
recording to the system track, you will not be able to the event editor menu.
overdub pitch bender operations after deleting pitch bender
events from the system track. You can use the procedure 4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
under “To insert an event” (page E-94) to insert pitch “DeleteBender” and then press the R-16
bender events. (ENTER) button.
• This causes “Delete Bender” screen to appear.
■ To delete all pitch bender events in a track
1. Display the event editor screen of the track 5. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
whose pitch bender events you want to delete. setting in the thick brackets (%) to “Locator”.
• This displays a range specification screen like the one
shown below.
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) • If you have already specified a range using the locator
the event editor menu.

“DeleteBender” and then press the R-16
(ENTER) button.
• This causes “Delete Bender” screen to appear.
Range start point Range end point

4. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the position.
setting in the thick brackets (%) to “ALL”, and 7. After everything is the way you want, press the
then press the R-16 (ENTER) button. R-16 (ENTER) button.
5. In response to the “Sure?” message that 8. In response to the “Sure?” message that
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete
or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel. or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
E-97
To adjust the velocity value of a note event 6. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• This will display the setting screen like the one shown
1. Display the event editor screen of the track you below.
want to edit.
2. Depending on the type of adjustment you want

make, perform one of the operations below.
To adjust this: Do this:
Individual note event On the event editor screen,
move the cursor to the note
event you want to adjust and
then advance to step 3. • The following explains the meanings and setting ranges
of the on-screen items. The settings marked with an
All note events in a track Advance to step 3.
asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial
Note events within a Advance to step 3. defaults.
specific range in a track
Item name Description Setting Range
Fix Specifies a fixed value as the oFF*, 001 to 127
3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) (Fixed value) velocity value.
Select “oFF” for this setting to
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button to display adjust based on the current
the event editor menu. velocity value of each note
event.
4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to Rate These settings are enabled 000% to 100%* to
“VelocityMod.” and then press the R-16 (Velocity Rate) only when the “oFF” is 200%
selected for the “Fix” setting.
(ENTER) button. They change the velocity
• This displays the “Velocity Modify” screen. value of each note event
according to the mathematical
expression (decimal parts cut
Offset off) shown below. 1 is used –126 to 000* to
(Velocity Offset) when the value produced by +126
the expression is less than 1,
and 127 is used when it is
greater than 127.
(Current velocity) X (Rate
setting) + (Offset setting)
7. To change the setting to the desired value,

press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
mode indicated in the thick brackets (%). 8. In response to the “Sure?” message that
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute
To adjust this: Select this mode:
the adjustment or the R-14 (NO) button to
Individual note event Cursor cancel.
All note events in a track All
Note events within a specific range Locator
in a track
• While the “Locator” mode is selected, use the R-17 (u,

i) buttons, the dial, or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to
specify the range whose note event velocity value you
want to adjust.
E-98
To adjust the gate time value of a note event To delete a beat event
1. Perform steps 1 through 5 under “To adjust the 1. Perform the procedure under “To start an event
velocity value of a note event” (page E-98). In editor operation” (page E-87) to display the
step 4, select “GatetimeMod.” instead of event editor menu.
“VelocityMod.”.
2. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. “Beat” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• This will display the setting screen like the one shown • This displays the “Beat” screen.
below.
• The following explains the meanings and setting ranges 3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the
of the on-screen items. The settings marked with an cursor to the beat event you want to delete.
asterisk (*) in the “Setting Range” column are initial
defaults. 4. Press the C-10 (DELETE) button.
Item name Description Setting Range • The event at the current cursor position will be deleted
Fix Specifies a fixed value as the *
oFF ,
as soon as you press the C-10 (DELETE) button.
(Fixed value) time gate value. 99:95 stands 00:00 to 99:95
for quarter note 99 beats, 95
ticks.
Select “oFF” for this setting to
adjust based on the current
gate time value of each note
event.
Rate These settings are enabled 000% to 100%* to
(Gate Time only when the “oFF” is 200%
Rate) selected for the “Fix” setting.
They change the gate time
value of each note event
according to the mathematical
expression (decimal parts cut
Offset off) shown below. 00:00 is –9:95 to 0:00* to
(Gate Time used when the value +9:95
Offset) produced by the expression is
less than 00:00, and 99:95 is
used when it is greater than
99:95.
(Current gate time) X (Rate
setting) + (Offset setting)
3. To change the setting to the desired value,

press the R-16 (ENTER) button.

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to execute
the adjustment or the R-14 (NO) button to
cancel.
E-99
To insert a beat event To perform step input

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To delete a beat 1. Display the event editor screen of the track
event” (page E-99). where you want to perform step input.
2. Move the cursor to the beat event that comes
immediately before the location where you want 2. Press the C-14 (STEP) button.
to insert a new beat event. • This will display a step screen like the one shown
below. The cursor is always flashing during step input.
3. Press the C-11 (INSERT) button.
• This will insert a new beat event into the next measure
after the cursor position you selected in step 2, which
does not contain a beat event. If, for example, there are
beat events already in measures 16 and 17, selecting
the beat event in measure 16 with the cursor and
pressing the C-11 (INSERT) button will insert a new
beat event into measure 18.
4. Change the beat event measure and beat as

Cursor (flashing)
required.
• Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the cursor, and
then use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the 3. Configure step input settings.
value at the cursor position. The cursor flashes during a (1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,
value change operation. Pressing the R-16 (ENTER) press the C-17 (MENU) button.
button applies the setting and causes the cursor to stop This displays the input menu shown below.
flashing. (When the system track is selected.)
5. To return to the event editor screen, press the

R-15 (EXIT) button.
Directly Inputting Note Events

(Step Input)
Step input is an event editor function. You can use step input
to specify the length and pitch of each individual note (note
event). In the system track, you also can perform step input of
Auto Accompaniment chords (chord events) as well. (2) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the
setting item you want to change.
(3) Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
setting value.
• Performing step input into a track that already contains
For information about the meanings and setting ranges
recorded data will not delete the existing data. This means
of the on-screen items, see “Input Menu Setting Items”
you can use step input to add to existing recorded data.
(page E-101).
4. Use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13 (sREW)

buttons to move the cursor to the location from
which you want to perform step input.
• The cursor will move in one-measure steps.
E-100 B
5. Use buttons R-1 (5) to R-4 ( • ) and buttons R-7 (6) to R-10 (,) to specify the length of the note you want
to input.
• For information about how to specify note lengths, see step 4 under “To insert an event” (page E-94).
• You can perform the following operations during step input to insert ties and rests.
To do this: Perform this operation:
Tie the note at the 1. At the current cursor position, specify the length of the note you want to tie with the immediately
current cursor position preceding note event.
with the note event 2. Press the R-11 (.) button.
immediately before it • This adds the length of the note you specified in step 1 to the length of the note immediately
preceding it. At this time, the cursor will move forward by the timing of the added amount.
62 62 2 A Preceding note event

B Current cursor position
A B A C C Cursor position after process
Insert a rest before the 1. At the current cursor position, specify a note that is the same length as the rest you want to insert.
current cursor position 2. Press the R-5 (REST) button.
• The cursor will move forward by the length of the note you specified in step 1.
62 6 2 B Current cursor position

B C C Cursor position after process
6. Press the keyboard key that corresponds to the note you want to input.
• The note is input as soon as you press the keyboard key, and the cursor will move by the length you specified in step 5 to the
next measure:beat:tick. From there you can input the next note, if you want.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to input the notes you want.

• If you want to input a series of notes of the same length, skip step 5 and perform step 6 only.
8. After inputting all of the notes you want, press the R-15 (EXIT) or R-17 (t, y) button.
• This returns to the event editor screen.
Input Menu Setting Items

Pressing the C-17 (MENU) button while holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button during step input will display the input menu.
The following explains the meanings and setting ranges of the input menu items. The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the
“Setting Range” column are initial defaults.
Item name Description Setting Range
GateRate Specifies the gate rate as a percentage of the actually input gate length for the 001% to 080%* to 100%
(Gate Rate) length (gate length) of the note event that was specified using buttons R-1 (5)
through R-4 ( • ) and R-7 (6) through R-10 (,). Specifying a GateRate of
080% and inputting a quarter note (96 ticks), for example, will result in a GATE
setting of 00:76 (96 X 0.8 = 76.8, cut off to 76).
Velocity Specifies the velocity value of an input note event or chord event. Specifying KeyOn, 001 to 100* to 127
(Velocity) “KeyOn” inputs a velocity value in accordance with applied key pressure.
SysTrack Selects either note event input or chord event input when inputting to the note*, Chord
(System Track) system track.
E-101
Using the Pattern Sequencer

L-8 C-3 R-15
C-7 C-5
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
L-12 L-14 L-16 C-10 C-17

L-13 L-15
About the Pattern Sequencer Recordable Data

You can use the pattern sequencer to record keyboard play
You can use the pattern sequencer to create accompaniment
(note data), PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) operations, and S-2
patterns that sound while using the Digital Keyboard’s Auto
(MODULATION) button operations.
Accompaniment function and store them as user rhythms.
Rhythms, Accompaniment Patterns, and Instrument Part Editing and Rec Areas
Instrument Parts As a general rule, pattern sequencer editing operations are
performed on an instrument part basis. The pattern sequencer
Each of the Digital Keyboard’s rhythms provides six different maintains special memory areas called “rec areas” for each
accompaniment patterns named INTRO, NORMAL, NORMAL instrument part during rhythm editing. These areas are used
FILL-IN, VARIATION, VARIATION FILL-IN, and ENDING. when recording keyboard notes.
Each accompaniment pattern can be made up of eight When editing with the pattern sequencer, there may be
instrument parts (drums, percussion, bass, and chord 1 previously existing rhythm data remaining for some of the
through chord 5). instrument parts, which will make it impossible to use the rec
The overall configuration of a single rhythm is as shown areas. The status of an instrument part that still contains
below. previously existing rhythm data is “Fix Data”.
You can use the pattern sequencer screen to check whether
Rhythm the currently selected instrument part is in the rec area or if it
INTRO NORMAL NORMAL FILL-IN is “Fix Data”.
Drums Drums Drums You can display the pattern sequencer screen by pressing the
Percussion Percussion Percussion C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button. This will display the
Bass Bass Bass pattern sequencer editing screen for the currently selected
Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5 rhythm (preset rhythm or previously stored user rhythm). The
initial screen shows the drum part of the NORMAL
VARIATION VARIATION FILL-IN ENDING accompaniment pattern of the rhythm being edited. Note “Fix
Drums Drums Drums Data” in the lower left corner. This is the current status of the
Percussion Percussion Percussion currently displayed instrument part.
Bass Bass Bass
Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5 Chord 1 to Chord 5
The pattern sequencer is a function that allows editing and

creation of the various accompaniment patterns that make up
a single rhythm, part-by-part. You can record each part of all
of the accompaniment patterns from scratch to create a
completely original new rhythm. You also can partially edit an
existing rhythm (by, for example, editing only one of the parts
of an accompaniment pattern) or simply modify its mixer
settings if you want.
E-102
The following describes each of the different instrument part

statuses that appear in the lower left corner of the screen. Creating a User Rhythm
When this is This section explains the various methods you can use to
It means this:
displayed: create user rhythms.
Fix Data Instrument part data from a preset ■ Editing One or More Parts of an Existing Rhythm
(Fixed Data) rhythm or user rhythm. The only
With this procedure, you edit an existing preset rhythm or
settings that can be edited for an
previously stored user rhythm to create a new rhythm.
instrument part with this status are
With this method, you can select and edit (or record anew)
mixer settings. Real-time recording of
specific parts of an existing accompaniment pattern and store
keyboard notes and event editing are
the result.
not allowed.
The following is the general flow for this method.
Recorded Data Instrument part is being edited using a
(Recorded Data) rec area, and recorded data is Check the content of the rhythm you will edit and
contained in the rec area. Mixer determine how (what part of what accompaniment
settings, real-time recording of pattern*) you will edit it.
keyboard notes, and event editing are
allowed for an instrument part with this Use the rec menu to configure settings related to
status. accompaniment pattern recording.
Empty Instrument part is being edited using a
(No data) rec area, but there is no recorded data Display the instrument part for the accompaniment
in the rec area (rec area empty). Mixer pattern you want to edit and then configure the desired
settings, real-time recording of mixer settings and record keyboard notes.
keyboard notes, and event editing are
allowed for an instrument part with this
status. After editing is complete, store the rhythm as a user
rhythm.
* You cannot edit the INTRO or ENDING of an

User Rhythm Numbers
accompaniment pattern of an existing rhythm.
Rhythm areas numbered F:001 through F:100 are for storage For full details about this procedure, see “To rehearse before
of user rhythms. You can have up to 100 user rhythms stored editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104) and “To edit an
in memory at one time. You can recall a stored user rhythm by existing rhythm” (page E-107).
pressing the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS) button. See “Playing
an Auto Accompaniment” (page E-24) for more information.
E-103
■ Replacing the Accompaniment Patterns of an To rehearse before editing an existing

Existing Rhythm with New Recordings
rhythm
With this procedure, you re-record one or more of the
accompaniment patterns of an existing preset rhythm or 1. Select the rhythm you want to edit in order to
previously stored user rhythm to create a new rhythm. create your user rhythm.
In this case, you clear all of the rec areas included in an
accompaniment pattern and then create new recordings of 2. Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button.
each part of the accompaniment pattern. Use this method, for
example, when you want to create only a new INTRO
accompaniment pattern for an existing rhythm.
Clear all of the rec areas of the accompaniment pattern

you want to record anew.
• This displays the pattern sequencer screen.
Use the rec menu to configure settings related to
Currently selected instrument part
accompaniment pattern recording.
On the edit menu, configure accompaniment pattern

number of measure and beat settings.
Sequentially record each of the parts.
After editing is complete, store the entire rhythm as a

user rhythm.
For full details about this procedure, see “To create a new
accompaniment pattern” (page E-109). Currently selected accompaniment pattern
■ Newly Recording All Accompaniment Patterns of

Currently selected instrument part status
a Rhythm See “Instrument Part Editing and Rec Areas” (page E-102).
With this procedure, you create a new rhythm from scratch,
without using an existing rhythm.
Clear all of the rec areas included in the currently

selected rhythm.
Use the rec menu to configure settings related to

accompaniment pattern recording.
On the edit menu, configure accompaniment pattern

number of measure and beat settings.
Sequentially record each of the parts of each

accompaniment pattern.
After editing is complete, store the rhythm as a user

rhythm.
For full details about this procedure, see “To create a new
rhythm from scratch” (page E-111).
E-104
3. Use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through L-15 (3) Press the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time.
(SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the • This changes the “Part” setting to “Sol”, which
accompaniment pattern you want to play. If you indicates that the selected instrument part will be
sounded alone (solo).
want to play the INTRO accompaniment pattern,
for example, press the L-12 (INTRO) button.
• Each press of the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) button

toggles between NORMAL and NORMAL FILL-IN, and • To return all parts to their original (non-solo) status,
each press of the L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button press the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time or
toggles between VARIATION and VARIATION FILL-IN. press either of the R-17 (u, i) buttons.
• The indicator for the currently selected accompaniment
pattern will flash on the display. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 as required to
determine which accompaniment patterns you
Selecting this accompaniment Causes this indicator
pattern: to flash:
want to edit and which parts you want to
re-record.
INTRO E
• If you want to proceed directly into the editing operation
NORMAL F from this point, perform the procedure under “To edit an
NORMAL FILL-IN FG existing rhythm” (page E-107). If you do, you can either
allow the accompaniment pattern to continue to play, or
VARIATION H you can stop playback by pressing the L-16 (START/
VARIATION FILL-IN GH STOP) button.
ENDING J 7. To exit this procedure without going directly
into the editing operation, press the C-5
4. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button.
• The specified accompaniment pattern plays back in a • If the accompaniment pattern is playing when you press
loop. To sound bass and chord notes, play a chord on the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button, playback
the chord keyboard. will stop, the display will exit the pattern sequencer
• Each press of the L-16 (START/STOP) button during screen, and the screen that was displayed in step 1 of
the following operation starts or stops playback. this procedure will appear.
5. If you want to hear the notes of a particular

instrument part played alone, perform the
following steps.
(1) Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the
instrument part you want to hear played alone.
• The name of the instrument part you select will
appear on the display.
Selecting this Causes this name to
instrument part: appear on the display:
Percussion PERC
Drums DRUM
Bass BASS
Chord 1 to Chord 5 CHORD1 to CHORD5
(2) Press the C-7 (MIXER) button and then press the
R-17 (y) button to move the 0 to “Part”.
E-105
To configure pattern rec settings (Rec Menu) Display:

Description
Setting
Item name Range
1. While the pattern sequencer screen is PlayChord: Starting recording of an oFF, C*,
displayed, press the C-3 (RECORD) button. Playback accompaniment pattern starts C7, Cm
• The button will start to flash and the Digital Keyboard Chords repeat playback of all the parts of
will enter record standby. the pattern, except for the part
being recorded. During such
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) repeat playback, you can use this
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button. setting to specify the chord type to
be used for playback by bass and
• This displays a rec menu screen like the one shown
chord parts. Available settings are
below.
“C” (C major), “C7” (C 7th), and
“Cm” (C minor). Selecting “oFF”
turns off bass and chord part
notes.
Metronome: Specifies whether the metronome oFF*, on
Metronome should sound (on) or not sound
(oFF) during recording.
4. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to exit the rec

menu.
• This returns to the pattern sequencer screen.
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of
the items described in the table below and then 5. Press the C-3 (RECORD) button.
use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the • This exits record standby, which will cause the button to
setting. change from lit to unlit.
• The settings marked with an asterisk (*) in the “Setting
Range” column are initial defaults.
Display: Setting
Description
Item name Range
Quantize: Specify either recording of notes in oFF*, 4, 8,
Quantize the timing they are played on the 8T, 16, 16T
keyboard (oFF) or automatic
alignment of notes with a base
note (setting other than oFF).
Selecting a value specifies the
length of each note. “4” specifies
quarter notes, while a “T” setting
specifies triplets.
Precount: Specifies whether a precount oFF, 1*, 2
Pre-count should sound before recording
starts after the L-16 (START/
STOP) button is pressed in record
standby. Selecting “1” sounds a
one-measure precount, while “2”
sounds a two-measure precount.
Selecting “oFF” turns off the
precount, so recording starts as
soon as the L-16 (START/STOP)
button or a keyboard key is
pressed.
E-106
To edit an existing rhythm (1) Press the C-7 (MIXER) button to display the mixer
screen.
1. Perform steps 1 through 6 under “To rehearse
before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104).
2. Perform the procedure under “To configure

pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).
• This step is not necessary if you want to perform
operations using initial default settings or if you want to
use previous settings without changing them.
3. Press the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) or L-14

(VARIATION/FILL-IN) button to select the (2) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of the
items described in the table below and then use the
accompaniment pattern you want to edit.
dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the setting.
• You cannot edit the INTRO or ENDING
accompaniment pattern of an existing rhythm. If you Display: Setting
want to create a new accompaniment pattern (INTRO, Setting
Item name Range
ENDING, etc.) from this point, see “To create a new *1
TONE: Specifies the instrument part
accompaniment pattern” (page E-109) or “To create a
Part tone tone.
new rhythm from scratch” (page E-111).
Part: Toggles an instrument between oFF, on
4. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the Part On/Off sounding (on) and not sounding
instrument part you want to edit. (oFF).*2
Volume: Specifies the instrument part 000 to 127
Currently selected instrument part
Part Volume volume.
Pan: Specifies whether the sound of –64 to 00 to
Part Pan the part can be heard from the +63*3
left side or right side.
Rev.Send: Specifies the level of reverb 000 to 127
Part Reverb (page E-31) applied to the
Send instrument part.
Cho.Send: Specifies the level of chorus 000 to 127
Part Chorus (page E-31) applied to the
Send instrument part.
*1 You can select any preset tone except for the drawbar
Currently selected accompaniment pattern organ and user tones. Only drum set sounds (tone
numbers J:129 through J:146) can be selected for drum
parts and percussion parts. Drum set sounds cannot be
Currently selected instrument part status
See “Instrument Part Editing and Rec Areas” (page E-102). selected for the bass and the Chord 1 through Chord 5
parts.
*2 You can temporarily sound the notes of individual parts, if
5. Configure mixer settings for the selected you want. For details, see step 5 under “To rehearse
before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104).
instrument part. You can skip this step if you do
*3 A smaller value shifts the pan position to the left while a
not want to configure mixer settings. larger value shifts to the right. A value of zero specifies
• Here you can press the L-16 (START/STOP) button to center.
start playback of the accompaniment pattern and
configure mixer settings as you monitor the effects of (3) To exit the mixer, press the C-7 (MIXER) button or the
the settings on the notes being played. R-15 (EXIT) button.
• This returns to the pattern sequencer screen.
E-107
6. If you want to record notes you play on the (3) Checking the timing (beat and measure) of the
keyboard in real time, perform the following playback of other parts, perform keyboard, PITCH
steps. BEND (S-1) wheel, and S-2 (MODULATION) button
• The operation you can perform here depends on the operations as required.
• The operations you perform are recorded. What
status (page E-103) of the currently selected part, as
you record is played back when recording loops
described below.
back to the measure and beat where you recorded
For this status: You can perform this operation: a keyboard, pitch bend or modulation operation.
Fix Data Perform step (2) of the procedure below • To delete specific recorded notes, hold down the
to record new notes to replace the C-10 (DELETE) button. When playback reaches
instrument parts in the rec areas. the note you want to delete, press the keyboard
that corresponds to the note to be deleted.
Recorded Data Perform step (2) of the procedure below Holding down the C-10 (DELETE) button along
to over-record additional notes while with one or more keyboard keys while playback is
retaining note data previously recorded being performed will delete all of the notes that
for instrument part. correspond to the keyboard keys as they played
Empty Record all new notes (because the rec while the button and keys are held down.
areas are empty). • Until you perform step (4) below, you can layer
keyboard notes and delete recorded notes as many
(1) Press the C-3 (RECORD) button. times as you like.
• The button will start to flash and the Digital (4) To stop recording, press the C-3 (RECORD) button.
Keyboard will enter record standby. • This stops accompaniment pattern playback and
causes the button to go from lit to unlit. The
instrument part status will become “Recorded
Data”.
• You can press the C-3 (RECORD) button again

here to exit record standby (button goes from lit to
unlit).
(2) To start recording while the C-3 (RECORD) button
flashing, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button. 7. If required, perform the procedure under “To
• This causes the button to change from flashing to edit events with the pattern sequencer” (page
lit. E-115).
• You can make fine corrections to the notes you played
on the keyboard and add new notes, if you want. For
details, see “Editing Individual Events (Event Editor)”
(page E-113).
• If accompaniment pattern playback is stopped,

accompaniment pattern repeat playback (excluding
the instrument part being recorded) starts. Measure
and beat values in the lower right corner of the
display will count up along with playback until the
end of the accompaniment pattern is reached.
Then playback will restart from 001:1.
E-108
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for all of the parts you 4. Configure the accompaniment pattern number
want to edit. of measure and beat settings.
• It is recommended that you save the rhythm as a user (1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,
rhythm each time you finish editing each press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display the edit menu.
accompaniment pattern. For details about how to do
this, see “To store an edited or newly created rhythm”
(page E-111).
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to edit all of the

rhythm’s accompaniment patterns you want.
10. After completing all of the editing you want,

adjust the tempo of the rhythm as desired.
• The tempo you set here becomes the initial default
tempo of the accompaniment pattern. (2) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
“ElementEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
11. For details about how to save the final version button.
of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store • This displays the “ElementEdit” screen.
an edited or newly created rhythm” (page (3) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select one of the
items described in the table below and then use the
E-111).
To create a new accompaniment pattern Display: Item

Setting Range
name
1. Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button. Measure: Number INTRO, ENDING: 01 to 16
• This displays the pattern sequencer screen. For details of measures NORMAL, VARIATION: 01 to 16
about screen contents, see step 2 under “To rehearse NORMAL FILL-IN, VARIATION
before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104). FILL-IN: 01 to 02
2. Perform the procedure under “To clear all Beat: Beat 2/4 to 4/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8
instrument part rec areas included in an
(4) Press the R-15 (EXIT) button twice to exit the edit
accompaniment pattern” (page E-120). menu.
• Select the accompaniment pattern you want to record
anew and then perform the clear operation. 5. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the
instrument part you want to record.
pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106). Currently selected instrument part
Currently selected accompaniment pattern
Currently selected instrument part status (page E-102)
E-109
6. Configure mixer settings for the selected (3) Checking the timing (beat and measure) of the
instrument part. You can skip this step if you do playback, perform keyboard, PITCH BEND (S-1)
not want to configure mixer settings. wheel, and S-2 (MODULATION) button operations as
• For details about mixer setting operations, see step 5 required.
• The operations you perform are recorded. What
under “To edit an existing rhythm” (page E-107).
you record is played back when recording loops
7. Configure part parameter settings for the back to the measure and beat where you recorded
a keyboard, pitch bend or modulation operation.
selected instrument part. You can skip this step
• To delete specific recorded notes, hold down the
if you do not want to configure part parameter C-10 (DELETE) button. When playback reaches
settings. the note you want to delete, press the keyboard
• You also will be able to configure part parameter that corresponds to the note to be deleted.
settings after recording, if you want. If you want to Holding down the C-10 (DELETE) button along
perform PITCH BEND (S-1) wheel operations while with one or more keyboard keys while playback is
recording, it is a good idea to configure the bend range being performed will delete all of the notes that
beforehand. correspond to the keyboard keys that are played
• For details, see “Configuring Instrument Part Playback while the button and keys are held down.
Settings (Part Parameters)” (page E-116). • Until you perform step (4) below, you can layer
keyboard notes and delete recorded notes as many
8. If you want to record notes you play on the times as you like.
keyboard in real time, perform the following (4) To stop recording, press the C-3 (RECORD) button.
steps. • This stops accompaniment pattern playback and
(1) Press the C-3 (RECORD) button. causes the button to go from lit to unlit. The
• The button will start to flash and the Digital instrument part status will become “Recorded
Keyboard will enter record standby. Data”.
• You can press the C-3 (RECORD) button again 9. If required, perform the procedure under “To
here to exit record standby (button goes from lit to edit events with the pattern sequencer” (page
unlit).
E-115).
(2) To start recording while the C-3 (RECORD) button
• You can make fine corrections to the notes you played
flashing, press the L-16 (START/STOP) button.
• The button will change from flashing to lit, and the on the keyboard and add new notes, if you want. For
details, see “Editing Individual Events (Event Editor)”
display will show an up-count of measures and
(page E-113).
beats. The count will re-start from 001:1 when the
final beat of the number of measures you specified
in step 4 is reached.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 for all of the parts you
want to record.
11. After completing all of the editing you want,

tempo of the accompaniment pattern.
12. For details about how to save the final version

of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store
an edited or newly created rhythm” (page
E-111).
E-110
To create a new rhythm from scratch 2. The 0 should be next to “Store”, so press the
1. Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button. • This displays a screen for specifying the destination
• This displays the pattern sequencer screen. For details user rhythm number and rhythm name.
about screen contents, see step 2 under “To rehearse
before editing an existing rhythm” (page E-104). Destination user rhythm number
2. Perform the procedure under “To clear all rec

areas included in the currently selected
rhythm” (page E-120).

pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).
Rhythm name
4. Use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through L-15
(SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the 3. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select
accompaniment pattern you want to create the destination user rhythm number you want.
anew.
5. Perform steps 4 and 10 under “To create a new cursor to the name character position you want
accompaniment pattern” (page E-109). to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 to create all of the • For details about the characters you can input, see
accompaniment patterns you want. “Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).
7. After completing all of the operations you want, at the same time.
• The tempo you set here becomes the initial default 5. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
tempo of the accompaniment pattern. • This stores the data.
• If the user rhythm number where you are storing the
8. For details about how to save the final version data already has data stored to it, a message
of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store (Replace?) will appear on the display to confirm
an edited or newly created rhythm” below. whether you want to overwrite the existing data with the
new data. Press the R-14 (YES) button to overwrite.
To store an edited or newly created rhythm
1. While the pattern sequencer screen is on the • The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display
display after rhythm editing or creation is
complete, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the
button as you press the C-17 (MENU) button. memory card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be
• This displays the pattern sequencer menu screen. deleted or become corrupted. It also can cause the
E-111
Creating a User Rhythm by

• Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button in place of the operation in
step 1 displays the confirmation screen shown below.
Combining Exiting Rhythm Parts
Pressing the R-14 (YES) button at this time will display the (Easy Edit)
user rhythm store screen in step 2.
You can combine instrument parts from different rhythms
(preset or user) to create a new user rhythm. You also can
use the mixer settings of each part to change the tone and
adjust volume.
To edit an existing rhythm with Easy Edit
1. Select the rhythm you want to edit in order to

create your user rhythm.
To cancel the editor operation without saving the edited 2. Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button
results, press the R-14 (NO) button. to display the pattern sequencer screen.
To clear user rhythm data 3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
1. Press the C-5 (PATTERN SEQUENCER) button the edit menu.
to display the pattern sequencer screen.

• This displays the pattern sequencer menu screen.

“Clear” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays a screen for specifying the number of the
rhythm you want to clear. 4. The 0 should be next to “EasyEdit”, so press
4. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• This displays the EASY EDIT screen shown below.
the user rhythm number you want to clear.
Instrument part being edited

Accompaniment pattern being edited
(POWER) button is pressed. If this happens, refer to Rhythm number and rhythm name assigned to the instrument part
of the accompaniment pattern being edited (Default: Number and
“Troubleshooting” (page E-150). name selected in step 1)
5. Use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through L-15

(SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the
accompaniment pattern you want to edit.
E-112
6. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to select the

instrument part you want to edit. Editing Individual Events
(Event Editor)
7. Edit the selected accompaniment pattern
The pattern sequencer records the keyboard, pitch bender,
instrument part as desired. and modulation operations recorded for each instrument part
• While performing the procedure below, you can press as “events”. Playing a note on the keyboard, for example,
the L-16 (START/STOP) button and perform repeat stores the following as events: note start measure, beat, and
playback of only the accompaniment pattern you are track, note pitch, note length, and note intensity.
editing. Each press of the L-16 (START/STOP) button The following editing operations are supported for individual
starts or stops playback. events.
(1) While [RHYTHM] is displayed on the EASY EDIT • Deleting events
screen, specify the number of the rhythm you want to • Inserting events
assign to the instrument part of the selected • Copying events within a specific range to a desired location
accompaniment pattern. • Quantizing* note events
Settings are configured using the same procedures as • Deleting pitch bender events
those for rhythm selection. Perform steps 1, 2, and 3 • Adjusting note event velocity values
under “Playing an Auto Accompaniment” (page E-24). • Adjusting note event gate time values
Specifying rhythm number F:101 at this time makes it • Selecting the type of events that appear on the Event Editor
possible to assign the rhythm data currently being screen (View Select)
edited with the pattern sequencer. • Directly inputting note events (step input)
(2) Configure the mixer settings of the selected
accompaniment pattern instrument part as desired. * Quantize is an operation that automatically adjusts the note
• For details about mixer setting operations, see step on timing of a note event to match a reference note.
5 under “To edit an existing rhythm” (page E-107).
• You can perform event editing on an instrument part

whose status (page E-103) is “Recorded Data” or
• Performing rhythm assignment in step (1) above also
“Empty”. You cannot configure part parameters for an
will automatically change mixer settings to the initial
defaults for the assigned rhythm. Because of this, instrument part whose status is “Fix Data”.
• Though you cannot perform event editing directly on
changing the rhythm after configuring mixer settings in
an instrument part whose status is “Fix Data”, you can
step (2) will cause the configured mixer settings to be
copy such an instrument part to a rec area and edit the
cleared.
• When INTRO or ENDING is selected as the copied data. For details about the copy operation, see
“To copy preset or user rhythm instrument part data to
accompaniment pattern, the same rhythm is assigned
a rec area” (page E-119).
to all eight instrument parts. Because of this,
performing rhythm assignment in step (1) for an INTRO
or ENDING will change the rhythm of all instrument
parts at one time.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to edit other

accompaniment patterns and instrument parts.
9. After editing is complete, adjust the tempo of

the rhythm as desired.
tempo.
10. For details about how to save the final version

of the rhythm as a user rhythm, see “To store
an edited or newly created rhythm” (page
E-111).
E-113
● Pitch bender, modulation

Event Editor Screen Contents
“Bend” (pitch bender even) or “Mod” (modulation event) is
The event editor screen shows the individual events recorded indicated to the right of the event location information,
to an instrument part as shown in the sample screen below. followed by parameter value. “VALU” is displayed at 1 when
the cursor is located at a parameter value.
Event being edited (selected event)
1
Cursor
Events before (previous event) and after Event name (Bend or Mod)
(following event) the current event
Parameter value (VALU)
• The event editor screen shows three events at one time.
The event in the middle line is the selected event. You can
■ Settings
change the value where the solid-line cursor is located. A
broken line under a setting value indicates that the cursor Event Parameters Setting Range
can be moved to that value. Note name C- to C0 to G9*
• The values in the format “001:01:00” at the beginning of the
event indicate the recording location (timing) of the event as Note Gate time 00:00 to 99:95
measure:beat:tick. A “tick” is a time unit that is shorter than Velocity 001 to 127
one beat. Pattern sequencer data uses 96 ticks per beat
Pitch Bender Pitch Bender –8192 to 0000 to +8191
(for 2/4 to 8/4) or 48 ticks per beat (for 2/8 to 16/8).
Modulation Modulation 000 to 127
Pattern sequencer records three types of events: notes
* When “C-” is displayed, it indicates C-1 (one octave below
(keyboard play), pitch bender operations, and modulation
C0).
operations. These events are represented on the screen as
described below.
● Notes
The note name is indicated to the right of the event location
information, followed by the gate time (note length), and
velocity (note speed) parameters. 1 shows an abbreviation of
the parameter name where the cursor is currently located.
Note name (NOTE) Velocity (VEL)

Gate time (GATE)
E-114
To edit events with the pattern sequencer 4. Perform the following operations.
Perform this procedure,
1. On the pattern sequencer screen, select the To do this:
starting from step 2:
“Recorded Data” or “Empty” status instrument Change the settings of already “To edit an existing event”
part whose events you want to edit. recorded event data (page E-92)
• You can perform event editing on one of the following Delete an individual event “To delete an individual event”
types of parts. (page E-92)
– A “Recorded Data” or “Empty” status part that you
are currently editing using the procedure under “To Delete all events in a track “To delete all events in a track”
(page E-93)
edit an existing rhythm” (page E-107)
– A “Recorded Data” or “Empty” status part that you Delete all events within a “To delete all events in a
are currently editing using the procedure under “To specific range of the part being specific range of a track” (page
create a new rhythm from scratch” (page E-111) edited E-93)
– An “Empty” status part that has undergone one of Insert events “To insert an event” (page
the procedures under “To clear all rec areas E-94)
included in the currently selected rhythm” (page
Copy events within a specific “To copy the events within a
E-120), “To clear a rec area of an instrument part”
range to a desired location specific range to a desired
(page E-118), or “To clear all instrument part rec
location” (page E-94)
areas included in an accompaniment pattern” (page
E-120) Quantize an individual note “To quantize an individual note
– A “Recorded Data” status part that has undergone event event” (page E-95)
the procedure under “To copy preset or user rhythm Quantize all note events in the “To quantize all note events in
instrument part data to a rec area” (page E-119) part being edited a track” (page E-96)
Quantize all note events in a “To quantize all note events
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) specific range of the part being within specific range of a track”
button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display edited (page E-96)
the edit menu. Delete pitch bender events “Deleting Pitch Bender Events”
(page E-97)
Step input of note events “To perform step input” (page
E-100)*1
Batch adjust the velocity “To adjust the velocity value of
(intensity) of note events a note event” (page E-98)
included in the part being
edited
Batch adjust the gate time “To adjust the gate time value
(length) of note events of a note event” (page E-99)
included in the part being
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to edited
“EventEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) Select the types of events that “To select the types of events
button. appear on the event editor that appear on the Event Editor
screen screen (View Select)” (page
• This displays the event editor screen shown below. For
E-92)*2
information about display contents, see “Event Editor
Screen Contents” (page E-114).
*1 The “SysTrack” item on the input menu is not a pattern
sequencer event editor item.
*2 There are three view select setting items: Note,
PitchBend, and Modulation.
E-115

Configuring Instrument Part the items described in the table below and then
Playback Settings use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
(Part Parameters) setting.
• For details about each setting item, see “Pattern
The settings in this section control how instruments parts you
Sequencer Part Parameters” (page E-117).
are currently editing or creating are sounding when played
• You can configure only bend range settings for drum
back as Auto Accompaniment after being saved as a user and percussion parts.
rhythm. These settings are configured using the “PartPara”
(Part Parameter) item on the edit menu. Display: Item name Setting Range
Table: Chord conversion table 01 to 19
BreakPoint: Break Point C to B
• You can configure part parameters for an instrument
part whose status (page E-103) is “Recorded Data” or Invert: Inversion oFF, on, 7th
“Empty”. You cannot configure part parameters for an Retrigger: Retrigger oFF, on
instrument part whose status is “Fix Data”.
BendRange: Bend Range 00 to 12
To configure pattern sequencer part

parameters 5. After configuring the settings you want, press
the R-15 (EXIT) button twice.
1. On the pattern sequencer screen, select the • This returns to the pattern sequencer screen.
“Recorded Data” or “Empty” status instrument
part whose part parameters you want to
configure.

the edit menu.

“PartPara” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the “Part Para” screen.
E-116
Pattern Sequencer Part Parameters

■ Table (Chord conversion table)
Recording of each accompaniment pattern is normally performed using C major (root of C, major type).* When playing an Auto
Accompaniment, you can use a root other than C and a chord type other than major, if you want. This is accomplished by using a
“chord conversion table” to convert the C major recorded data to another root and/or chord type. Regardless of what root or chord
type you specify, the currently selected chord table is used to make corrections to suit the instrument parts and the type of music
being played in order to ensure musically natural accompaniment.
* Depending on the rec menu “PlayChord” setting. For details, see “To configure pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106).
With this parameter, you can select from among the 19 types of chord conversion tables listed below.
Accompaniment
Number Table Name Parts Description
Pattern
*1
01 Bass Basic Bass Normally used for a bass part.
*1 Variation of number 01. Always makes the first note the root
02 Bass f-root Bass
note when changing chords.
*1
03 Bass 7th Bass Used for a bass part recorded with a 7th chord.
04 Bass 7th f-root Bass
*1
05 Chord Basic Chord Normally used for a chord part.
*1
06 Chord Var2 Chord Used for a chord part that has a tension chord.
When a 7th chord is specified while playing, the 5th note is
*1
07 Chord Var3 Chord converted to a 7th note. In the case of C7, for example, G
becomes Bb.
*1
08 Chord Var4 Chord Variation of number 05 (Chord Basic).
*1
09 Chord 7th Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a 7th chord.
*1
10 Chord Minor Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a minor chord.
*1 Used for the chord part to which a phrase (such as a major
11 Phrase Chord
scale) was recorded.
*1
12 Chord Minor Bass Used for a bass part recorded with a minor chord.
13 Chord Minor f-root Bass
*1
14 Penta Phrase Chord Used for a chord part recorded with a pentatonic scale phrase.
*2 When a minor chord is specified while playing, converts to a
15 Intro n-minor Bass/chord
natural minor.
16 Intro m-minor Bass/chord
melodic minor (ascending).
17 Intro h-minor Bass/chord
harmonic minor.
*2 Recording of original as-is, with no minor/major conversion in
18 Intro no Change Bass/chord
accordance with chord specified while playing.
19 Intro dorian Bass/chord
dorian scale.
*1 For NORMAL, NORMAL FILL-IN, VARIATION, VARIATION FILL-IN

*2 For INTRO and ENDING
E-117
■ BreakPoint (Break Point)

This parameter specifies the key, from C to B, that is the point Instrument Part Operations
at which Auto Accompaniment bass and chord notes drop one
octave. To clear a rec area of an instrument part
For example when F is specified as the break point, a C major
chord recorded as C3E3G3 (CEG) becomes D3F#3A3 (DF#A 1. While the pattern sequencer screen is
raised one note each) when D is fingered on the chord displayed, use buttons L-12 (INTRO) through
keyboard, E3G#3B3 (EG#B raised one note each) when E is
L-15 (SYNCHRO/ENDING) to select the
fingered, and F2A2C3 (FAC dropped one octave) when F is
fingered. accompaniment pattern you want.
• The rec areas of the instrument parts included in the
■ Invert (Inversion) accompaniment pattern you select here are the ones
This parameter specifies whether or not chords during Auto that can be cleared by this procedure.
Accompaniment play should mirror inverted forms of the • If you select an INTRO or ENDING, the following steps
original chord (EGC and GCE for CEG). can be performed only when all parts are in rec areas
For example, let’s say that the original recorded C major (“Recorded Data” or “Empty” part status).
chord is CEG and an F chord is fingered on the chord
keyboard. If “oFF” is selected for this setting, the chord will be 2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
directly converted to FAC. If “on” (or “7th”) is selected, the button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display
chord will be converted to CFA, which is the inverted form that the edit menu.
is nearest to CEG. The transition of chord notes during
playback when “on” (or “7th”) is selected is smaller, so 3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
accompaniment sounds more natural. “PartEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
Note that you should select “7th” in place of “on” only if “C7”
button.
was specified for the “PlayChord” setting when recording the
accompaniment pattern and if you selected “09 (Chord 7th)” • This displays the “Part Edit” screen.
for the chord conversion table.
* “PlayChord” is a rec menu setting. For details, see “To
4. The 0 should be next to “Clear”, so press the
configure pattern rec settings (Rec Menu)” (page E-106). R-16 (ENTER) button.
• This displays the “Clear Part” screen.
• When selecting “on” (or “7th”) for this setting, make sure
that you select “C” for the “BreakPoint” (Break Point)
setting.
■ Retrigger (Retrigger)
This parameter specifies how accompaniment pattern play is
affected by a chord change that occurs part way through a
pattern.
When “on” is selected, the pattern “retriggers,” which causes
the currently playing note to change to the corresponding note
of the newly fingered chord. When “oFF” is selected, a chord 5. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to specify the
change causes the currently sounding note to be cut off, and instrument part you want to clear from the rec
the next note of the pattern of the newly fingered chord to be area then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
played.
■ BendRange (Bend Range)
This parameter specifies the bend range for pitch bender
operation in semitone steps the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button changes the status of
the instrument part you specified in step 5 to “Empty”.
E-118
To copy preset or user rhythm instrument 5. Specify a rhythm number, accompaniment

part data to a rec area pattern, and instrument part as the copy
destination.
• Use the R-17 (t, y, u, i) buttons to select one of
the items described in the table below and then use the
• This procedure copies note events only.
• You will not be able to perform this procedure if an
INTRO or ENDING is selected as the accompaniment Display: Item name Setting Range
pattern.
1Copy source rhythm A:001 to F:100
• When a percussion part or drum part is specified as the number
copy destination instrument part, you can specify a
percussion part or drum part as the copy source. When 2Copy source normal (NORMAL),
a bass part or a chord part (chord 1 through chord 5) is accompaniment nrmFil (NORMAL FILL-IN),
specified as the copy destination, you can specify a pattern Variat (VARIATION),
bass part or a chord part (chord 1 through chord 5) as VarFil (VARIATION FILL-IN)
the copy source. No other part combinations are 3Copy source part Percus (Percussion),
allowed. Drum (Drums), Bass (Bass),
Chord1 to Chord5 (Chord 1 to
1. While the pattern sequencer screen is Chord 5)
displayed, use the L-13 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) or
L-14 (VARIATION/FILL-IN) button to select an
6. After the settings are the way you want, press
accompaniment pattern, and the R-17 (u, i)
buttons to select an instrument part.
• The rec area of the accompaniment pattern/instrument 7. In response to the “Sure?” message that
part included in the accompaniment pattern is the copy appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to copy or
destinations.
2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) • The copied instrument part status will become
button, press the C-5 (EDIT) button to display “Recorded Data”.
the edit menu.

“PartEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the “Part Edit” screen.

button.
• This displays the “Part Copy” screen.
2 3
E-119

Accompaniment Pattern and “ElementEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
Rhythm Operations button.
• This displays the “ElementEdit” screen.
To clear all instrument part rec areas
included in an accompaniment pattern
the items described in the table below and then
1. While the pattern sequencer screen is use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the
displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) setting.
button and press the C-5 (EDIT) button to Display: Item name Setting Range
display the edit menu. Measure: INTRO, ENDING: 01 to 16
Number of measures NORMAL, VARIATION: 01 to 16
2. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to NORMAL FILL-IN, VARIATION
“ElementEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) FILL-IN: 01 to 02
button. Beat: Beat 2/4 to 4/4 to 8/4, 2/8 to 16/8
• This displays the “ElementEdit” screen.
3. The 0 should be next to “Clear”, so press the 4. After the settings are the way you want, press
R-16 (ENTER) button. the R-15 (EXIT) button twice to return to the
• This displays the “Clear Element” screen. pattern sequencer screen.
To clear all rec areas included in the

currently selected rhythm
1. While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button and press the C-5 (EDIT) button to
display the edit menu.

4. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to specify the “AllEdit” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
accompaniment pattern you want to clear and
button.
then press the R-16 (ENTER) button.
• This displays the “All Edit” screen.
5. In response to the “Sure?” message that 3. The 0 should be next to “Clear”, so press the
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or R-16 (ENTER) button.
• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button changes the status of 4. In response to the “Sure?” message that
all the instrument parts of the accompaniment pattern appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to clear or
you specified in step 4 to “Empty”. the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button changes the status of
To configure the accompaniment pattern all the instrument parts of all the accompaniment
number of measure and beat settings patterns to “Empty”.
• This procedure can be performed only when the status

of all of the instrument parts of the accompaniment
pattern is “Empty”.
1. While the pattern sequencer screen is

displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button and press the C-5 (EDIT) button to
display the edit menu.
E-120
Recording and Playing Audio

All of the sound output by the Digital Keyboard can be recorded as
audio files on a memory card. The maximum recording time for a
Audio Playback
single audio file is approximately 13 minutes. Up to 20 audio files This Digital Keyboard supports playback of audio files recorded by
(actual number of files depends on card capacity) can be recorded it, as well as audio files that you converted on a computer to a
on a single memory card. format supported by the Digital Keyboard.* You also can play
along on the keyboard during playback.
* Special application software (Data Manager) is required in
order to convert audio files. For details, see “Storing and
• To perform the operations described in this section, you
Loading Digital Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).
will need to obtain a commercially available SD memory
card or SDHC memory card with a capacity between 2GB
and 32GB (page E-136). Saving Audio Files on a Computer
• The audio recording operation performs memory card
You can use the special application software (Data Manager) to
delete and write operations simultaneously. Because of
access audio files on a memory card from your computer. You can
this, you may not be able to record correctly on certain
store audio files to a computer local disk and use your computer to
types of memory cards. If you experience recording
convert audio files to a format that can be played back by the
problems, try changing the file number of the recording or
Digital Keyboard. For details, see “Storing and Loading Digital
try using a different memory card.
Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).
Audio Recording and Playback Audio Recording and Playback

Functions Precautions
Audio Recording
Limitations during Recording and Playback
With audio recording, you can record sound output by the Digital
The following operations are not possible during audio recording
Keyboard as digital sampling data. Recordings are stored on the
and playback.
memory card as an audio file.
• User rhythm editing (page E-103)
■ Recording of Keyboard Play and Song Playback • User tone editing (page E-46)
The following can be recorded as-is. • User drawbar organ tone editing (page E-52)
• Rhythm mode keyboard play • User DSP data editing (page E-33)
You can record a keyboard performance that uses layer and • User preset editing (page E-58)
split, as well as Auto Accompaniment and music preset. • Song sequencer recording and editing (page E-68)
Registration setup recall, effect operations, and mixer • Registration setup save (page E-66)
operations are also supported during recording. • Card mode operations (page E-137)
• Song sequencer song playback Some other operations other than those listed above may also be
A song recorded with the song sequencer can be recorded to a disabled.
memory card file as it is played back. Most Digital Keyboard
operations that are supported during song playback are also Memory Card Precautions
supported during recording to a memory card file.
• Do not touch a memory card loaded in the Digital Keyboard
■ Recording of Sound Input from an External Device while recording or playback is in progress. This can cause
Sound input from an external device connected to the Digital operational problems due to electrostatic charge and creates
Keyboard’s T-6 (MIC IN) jack or T-4 (INST IN) jack is recorded the risk of making the card unusable. Before touching the
along with notes played on the Digital Keyboard and sound that is loaded memory card, first stop any ongoing recording or
played back on the Digital Keyboard. playback operation.
For details about the routes used for output of sound from this • Formatting a memory card on the Digital Keyboard will reserve
Digital Keyboard’s built-in sound source and output of sound from space for audio recording, which will reduce the total capacity
an external sound source, see the block diagram under of the memory card. The amount of the reduction depends on
“Configuration of Effects” (page E-29). the maximum number of audio recordings that you specified
when formatting the memory card (page E-137). Using a
computer to open a memory card that has been formatted on
• Input from the Digital Keyboard’s T-5 (AUDIO IN) jack is not the Digital Keyboard will show this reduced capacity, even if
recorded. there are no files on the card. This is normal and does not
indicate malfunction of the memory card.
E-121
Performing Audio Recording

Modes that Support Audio Recording
You can record keyboard play while in the rhythm mode or song sequencer mode.
• Recording is actually performed in the audio record mode, but you can switch between the rhythm mode screen and song
sequencer mode screen from the audio record mode screen. A : or < indicator on the display indicates whether
the rhythm mode screen or song sequencer mode screen is selected.
Audio record mode
Rhythm mode Song sequencer mode
Audio record screen Audio record screen
C-4 (SONG
SEQUENCER) button
R-17 (t, y) R-17 (t, y)

buttons buttons
Rhythm mode screen Song sequencer mode screen
C-9 (CARD) button
• Normally the audio record screen is displayed in the audio record mode, but you can switch to the rhythm mode screen or song
sequencer mode screen temporarily when you need to perform operations there. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to switch
between the audio record screen and the rhythm mode screen or sequencer mode screen.
• You can use the C-9 (CARD) and C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) buttons to switch between the rhythm mode screen and song
sequencer mode screen while in the audio record mode.
For details about navigating between modes and how to switch between screens, see “Navigating between Modes and Screens
during Recording Standby and Recording” (page E-125).
E-122
C-2 C-4 C-9 R-15

C-6
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
L-12 L-14 L-16 C-17

L-13 L-15 L-17
To get ready for audio recording To record play in the rhythm mode
1. Referring to “Audio Recording” (page E-121), 1. Perform the procedure under “To get ready for
determine what type of performance you want audio recording” (page E-123).
to record. • This enters the rhythm mode.
2. If you plan to use a microphone, CD player or 2. Select a tone and rhythm, and configure other
some other external device as a sound source settings for the song you plan to record.
during recording, turn off both the external
device and the Digital Keyboard and then
3. Press the C-2 (AUDIO RECORD) button.
connect them.
• For details about connections, see “Outputting Input
from an External Device or a Microphone through the
Digital Keyboard’s Speakers” (page E-12).
3. Turn on the keyboard. • This cause the > indicator to flash, which indicates
the audio record mode.
4. On the Digital Keyboard, format a memory card. • The C-2 (AUDIO RECORD) button will also start
• For details, see “Formatting a Memory Card” (page
flashing, which indicates audio record standby.
E-137).
• The audio record screen like the one shown below will
appear on the display.
5. Press the R-15 (EXIT) button to return to the
rhythm mode from the card mode. Audio file number
• If you have a memory card that you previous formatted
on the Digital Keyboard, skip steps 4 and 5, and simply
insert the card into the card slot (T-1). For details, see
“Loading and Removing a Memory Card” (page E-137).
This completes preparation for recording. Next, perform the

“To record play in the rhythm mode” below or the “To record
play in the song sequencer mode” procedure (page E-125).
Audio file name Time counter (minutes:seconds)
• The time counter shows how much time

(minutes:seconds) has elapsed since the start of
recording. You also can switch display contents to
show the tempo, measure, and beat, if you want as
described below.
• If there is an asterisk (*) in front of the audio file
number, it means the file already includes recorded
data. Starting recording while a file that already
contains recorded data is selected will cause the old
data to be overwritten by the new recording.
E-123
4. If required, perform the steps below to switch • If you selected a file number with an asterisk (*) in front
from the time counter screen to the tempo, of it in step 5, a file overwrite confirmation screen like
the one shown below will appear.
measure, beat screen. If you want to leave the
time counter displayed, go straight to step 5.
(1) While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button,
press the C-17 (MENU) button.
This displays a screen like the one shown below.
If you do not want to overwrite the file, press the R-14

(NO) button. This will return to step 5 of this procedure
where you can select a different audio file number.
If you do want to overwrite the file, press the R-14 (YES)
button. Recording will start and the C-2 (AUDIO
(2) Use the R-17 (y) button to move the thick brackets RECORD) button will change from flashing to lit. Start to
(%) to “Measure Beat” and then press the R-15 play what you want.
(EXIT) button.
This switches from the time counter to the tempo, 7. To quit recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO
measure, beat screen. RECORD) button again.
To return to the time counter screen, the R-17 (t) • This will cause the button to change from lit to unlit and
button in step (2) to move the thick brackets (%) to end recording.
“Recording Time” and then press the R-15 (EXIT) • The > indicator will stop flashing on the display to
button. indicate the audio play mode.
• Pressing the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button here will stop
5. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select recording and start playback of the audio file. For
an audio file number. details about audio file playback, see “Playing Back
Audio” (page E-126).
6. To start recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO • To exit the audio play mode, press the C-6 (AUDIO
RECORD) button. PLAY) button.
• If the file number you selected in step 5 does not have
an asterisk (*) next to it, the C-2 (AUDIO RECORD)
button will change from flashing to lit and recording will • During audio record standby, you can exit the audio record
start. Start to play what you want. mode by pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button.
• If you switch from the time counter to tempo, measure, beat
in step 4 of the procedure above, the count up operation will
begin when song (when in the song sequencer mode) or
rhythm (when in the rhythm mode) playback is started.
• The time counter (or tempo, measure, beat display) will
Flashing (Record standby) Lit (Recording) start to flash when there are 30 seconds of remaining
recording time. Recording will stop automatically when the
end of remaining recording time is reached.
E-124
To record play using a music preset Navigating between Modes and Screens
during Recording Standby and Recording
1. Perform the procedure under “To get ready for
audio recording” (page E-123). You can use the operations in this section to navigate
between modes and screens while recording.
• This enters the rhythm mode.
■ Rhythm Mode Operations (: indicator
2. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To perform displayed)
using a music preset” (page E-54).
• This enters music preset record standby. Operations in the Rhythm Mode
• You can use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to switch between
3. Perform steps 3 through 6 under “To record the audio record screen and the rhythm mode screen.
play in the rhythm mode” (page E-123) to start • While the audio record screen is displayed, press the C-9
(CARD) button to display the rhythm mode screen.
recording.
Displaying the Song Sequencer Mode Screen from the
4. Perform steps 5 through 7 under “To perform Rhythm Mode Screen
using a music preset” (page E-54). • While the audio record screen or rhythm mode screen is
displayed, press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to
5. To quit recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO display the song sequencer mode screen. This will cause
RECORD) button. the : indicator to disappear from the display and the
< indicator to appear.
To record play in the song sequencer mode ■ Song Sequencer Mode Operations (<
indicator displayed)
1. Perform the procedure under “To get ready for
audio recording” (page E-123). Operations in the Song Sequencer Mode
• You can use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to switch between
• This enters the rhythm mode.
the audio record screen and the song sequencer mode
2. Perform steps 1 through 3 under “To play a screen.
• While the song sequencer mode screen is displayed, press
recorded song” (page E-79) to prepare for song the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to display the audio
playback. record screen.
• This enters the song sequencer mode.
Displaying the Rhythm Mode Screen from the Song
3. Perform steps 3 through 6 under “To record Sequencer Mode Screen
play in the rhythm mode” (page E-123) to start • While the audio record screen or song sequencer mode
screen is displayed, press the C-9 (CARD) button to display
recording. the rhythm mode screen. This will cause the <
indicator to disappear from the display and the :
4. Press the L-16 (START/STOP) button to start indicator to appear.
song playback. • While the audio record screen or rhythm mode screen is
displayed, press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) button to
5. To quit recording, press the C-2 (AUDIO display the rhythm mode screen. This will cause the
RECORD) button. < indicator to disappear from the display and the
: indicator to appear. The screen content does not
change at this time.
E-125
• The audio playback screen shown below will be on the

Playing Back Audio display.
Audio file number
• You can start audio playback operations from the rhythm

mode or the song sequencer mode. You cannot start from
the card mode.
• You can perform normal keyboard play along with audio
playback, and you can use layer and split. The procedures
for selecting UPPER 1, UPPER 2, and LOWER parts are
the same as the ones used in the rhythm mode. For details,
see “Selecting a Tone” (page E-14) and “Layering and
Splitting Tones” (page E-15). Audio file name Time counter (minutes:seconds)
• Maximum polyphony is reduced by a maximum of two
notes during audio playback. • If there is an asterisk (*) in front of the audio file
• Rhythm play and song sequencer song playback cannot be number, it means the file already includes recorded
performed during audio playback standby and audio data.
playback.
• The time counter displayed during audio playback does not 2. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to select
exactly match the time counter displayed during recording. one the audio file numbers that has an asterisk
(*) in front of it.
Supported Audio Playback Files
This Digital Keyboard supports playback of audio files
3. Configure the following setting as required.
recorded by it, as well as audio files that you converted on a To do this: Do this:
computer to a format supported by the Digital Keyboard.*
* Special application software (Data Manager) is required in Start playback from Use the L-14 (dFF) and L-13
order to convert audio files. For details, see “Storing and any location (sREW) buttons to change the time
Loading Digital Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146). (minutes : seconds) counter reading to the location
(hours:minutes) from which you want
to start playback.
To play back a recorded audio file
Center cancel* Press the L-17 (PART SELECT)
1. Press the C-6 (AUDIO PLAY) button. button.
• This causes the > indicator to appear and the other
* For details, see “About center cancel” (page E-127).
mode indicator (: or <) to disappear
from the display, which indicates the audio play mode.
• The L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button will flash, which
indicates audio playback standby.
E-126
4. Press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button. ■ About center cancel

• This will start playback of the audio file and cause the Center cancel can be used to cut out the vocal part (which is
L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button to change from flashing to normally located in the center of the stereo field) from an
lit. The time counter also will start counting up. audio file stored to a memory card from your computer. How
• The following operations are supported during successful center cancel is in cutting out the audio depends
playback. on the audio file you are playing back.
Each press of the L-17 (PART SELECT) button toggles
To perform this
Do this: between center cancel and normal (no center cancel)
operation:
playback. The current setting can be determined by checking
Fast forward Hold down the L-14 (dFF) button or the graphic formed inside the level indicator as shown below.
rotate the dial to the right.*
Playback in
Fast backward Hold down the L-13 (sREW) button Status Playback standby
progress
or rotate the dial to the left.*
Pause Press the L-15 (PAUSE) button.
playback
Lower playback Press the R-14 (–) button, which will Normal
volume display a volume setting screen.
Rotating the dial to the left while this
screen is displayed also will lower
playback volume.
Raise playback Press the R-14 (+) button, which will
volume display a volume setting screen.
Rotating the dial to the right while this
screen is displayed also will raise
playback volume.
Center cancel Press the L-17 (PART SELECT) Center cancel
button.
* Dial operation is supported only while the audio play screen
is displayed.
• Playback stops automatically when it reaches the end
of a song. To stop playback part way through, press the
L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button.
5. To exit the audio play mode, press the C-6 • When the MIC/INST parameter (page E-42) “Pan” setting is
(AUDIO PLAY) button. “0” (initial default value), center cancel is applied to all
• This returns to the mode screen (rhythm mode or song sound recorded from an external device connected to the
sequencer mode) that was displayed before you T-6 (MIC IN) jack or the T-4 (INST IN) jack.
performed step 1 of this procedure.
• During audio record standby, you can exit the audio play
mode by pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button.
• During the above operation, you can press the C-6 (AUDIO
PLAY) button to exit the audio play mode.
E-127
To repeat play a specific phrase To rename an audio file

1. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To play back 1. Press the C-6 (AUDIO PLAY) button to enter the
a recorded audio file” (page E-126) to start audio play mode.
playback.
2. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to display
2. When playback reaches the location you want the audio file number of the file you want to
to specify as the repeat start point, press the rename.
L-12 (REPEAT) button.
• This will display a screen like the one shown below, 3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
which shows the start point you specified button, press the C-17 (MENU) to display the
(minutes:seconds) and the flashing ? indicator. audio play menu.
3. When playback reaches the location you want 4. The 0 should be next to “Rename”, so press
to specify as the repeat end point, press the the R-16 (ENTER) button.
L-12 (REPEAT) button again. • This displays the “Rename” screen.
• This will immediately return to the start point you
specified in step 2 and start repeat playback. At this 5. Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the
time a screen like the one shown below showing the cursor to the name character position you want
end point you specified (minutes:seconds) will be to change, and then use the dial or R-14 (–, +)
displayed first. After a few seconds, the display will
change to the original audio play screen.
• For details about the characters you can input, see
“Supported Input Characters” (page E-160).
at the same time.

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to change
the name or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel and
• The ? indicator will be on the display while repeat return to the audio play screen.
playback is in progress. • Pressing the R-15 (EXIT) button without pressing the
• The operations you can perform during repeat playback R-14 button will return to the screen in step 5 of this
are the same as those that are supported during normal procedure.
playback. For details, see step 4 under “To play back a
recorded audio file” (page E-126).
4. To cancel repeat playback, first press the L-16

(PLAY/STOP) button to stop it. Next, press the
• This causes the ? indicator to disappear from the
display.
E-128
To clear the data of an audio file or delete an

audio file
1. Press the C-6 (AUDIO PLAY) button to enter the
audio play mode.
2. Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to display

the audio file you want to clear or delete.
• To clear the audio data in a file, display the number of
the file. File numbers run from 001 up to the maximum
number of audio recordings that you specified when
formatting the memory card (page E-137). In this case,
the file itself will not be deleted.
• To delete a file, display an audio file other than those
described above (audio file saved to the memory card
using Data Manager*).
* For details, see “Storing and Loading Digital
Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146).

the audio play menu.

“Clear” (or “Delete”) and then press the R-16
(ENTER) button.
5. In response to the confirmation message that

appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to perform
the applicable operation or the R-14 (NO) button
to cancel.
E-129
CTK7200_e. oo 1 0 ページ２０１４年３月７日　金曜日　午後３時４分
Using the Function Menu

L-3 R-15
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
C-17
R-18
The function menu includes settings that normally need to be 2. To adjust the “Tune” (Tuning) and “EQ”
accessed relatively infrequently, such as overall tuning, (Equalizer) settings, use the R-17 (t, y)
equalizer, touch response, local control on/off, etc. It also
buttons to move the 0 to the setting you want
includes some memory card operations (format, etc.).
to adjust, use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons
to change the setting. The currently selected
Using the Function Menu setting will also be indicated by thick brackets
This section explains function menu operations. For details (%).
about specific function menu items, see “Function Menu • Pressing the R-14 (–, +) buttons at the same time
Settings” (page E-131). returns the setting to its initial default.
• Changing the tuning value does not affect audio
To change the setting of a function menu playback (page E-126).
item 3. The setting items from “Performance” and
1. Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button. below are groups that include multiple setting
items. Use the following procedure to change
the settings of the items in each group.
(1) Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to the
desired group name and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the items included within the group.
• This displays the function menu like the one shown

below.
Example: Performance group
(2) Use the R-17 (t, y, u, i) buttons to move the 0

to the setting you want to change.
setting value.
returns an item to its initial default setting.
(4) To return to the function menu, press the R-15 (EXIT)
button.
E-130 B
4. To exit the function menu, press the R-13 Performance (Performance/Accompaniment)

(FUNCTION) button or R-15 (EXIT) button. Group
• Note that all function menu settings you configure are • You can directly display this group screen without going
returned to their initial defaults whenever you turn off through the function menu. While the initial power on
the Digital Keyboard. You can configure the Digital screen is displayed, hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
Keyboard so it remembers its latest settings or to apply button as you press the C-17 (MENU) button.
predetermined default settings each time you turn it on.
For details, see “AutoResume (Auto Resume)” (page
E-134) and “Default (Default Settings)” (page E-134).
• Some function menu settings also can be saved to
registration memory. For details, see “Saving
Keyboard Setups to Registration Memory” (page E-66).
Function Menu Settings

This section explains the meaning of each function menu
setting item, and provides information about setting ranges
and initial default values. Touch (Touch Response)
• For each item, the initial default setting is indicated by an Select one of the settings below to specify the relationship
asterisk (*). between key pressure and note volume.
oFF : Constant note volume regardless of keyboard pressure
Tune (Tuning) 1* : Normal
2 : Strong sound even with light pressure
Fine tunes the overall keyboard tuning in 0.1 Hz steps.
A4=415.5 - 440.0* - 465.9 Hz
TchOffVel (Touch Off Velocity)
Specifies the velocity value setting when the Touch setting is
• Changing the tuning value does not affect audio playback off.
(page E-126). 000 - 100* - 127
EQ (Equalizer) Ped.Setting (Pedal Setting)
One of five presets can be selected to change the overall ■ Ped.Assign (Pedal Assign)
frequency characteristics of the sound. Specifies the operation of the pedal connected to T-3
oFF *
:Equalizer off (SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK).
Soft :Suppressed high tones for a softer sound SUS* : Sustain pedal
Bright :Enhanced high tones for a brighter sound SSt : Sostenuto pedal
B.Boost :Enhanced low tones (Bass Boost) SFt : Soft pedal
Powerful :Enhanced volume rHy : Rhythm start/stop switch
■ Upper1, Upper2, Lower, A.HAR.

These settings specially on* (effect applied) or oFF (effect not
applied) for the UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, and Auto
Harmonize parts for the operation currently assigned to the
pedal.
Upper1 : UPPER 1
Upper2 : UPPER 2
Lower : LOWER
Lights A.HAR. : Auto Harmonize
• When the Pedal Assign setting is “rHy”, the on/off settings
of these parts are disabled, and the pedal functions as a
rhythm start/stop switch.
B
E-131
BendRange (Bend Range) RegFltAcmp (Registration Filter: Accompaniment)

Specifies the range of pitch change that occurs when the Specifies if accompaniment settings are recalled (oFF*) when
PITCH BEND wheel (S-1) is rotated. a registration setup (page E-66) is recalled, or if
00 - 02* - 24 semitones accompaniment settings are not recalled (on).
ArpegHold (Arpeggiator Hold) RegFltScal (Registration Filter: Scale)

Specifies the how arpeggio is played in accordance with Specifies if scale settings are recalled (oFF) when a
pressed keyboard keys when the arpeggiator (page E-23) is registration setup (page E-66) is recalled, or if scale settings
being used. are not recalled (on*).
oFF* : Arpeggio played while the keys of a chord are
depressed on the keyboard Play/CardUtl (Playback, Card Utility) Group
on : Arpeggio played after keyboard keys are released
• You can directly display this group screen without going

• When “on” is selected for this setting, you can turn off
through the function menu. While in the card mode (page
arpeggio play pressing the R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/
E-137), hold down the R-13 (FUNCTION) button as you
ARPEGGIATOR) button to disable the arpeggiator, or you press the C-17 (MENU) button.
can change this setting to “oFF”.
ArpegSpeed (Arpeggiator Speed)

Specifies how many times notes or chords should sound
within one beat for arpeggio phrases played by the
arpeggiator (page E-23).
1, 2, 2S, 3, 4*, 4S, 6, 8
The setting value indicates the number of times within one
beat. Selecting an option that is only a value will sound the
note that number of times within one beat. Selecting “4”, for
example, will play with the rhythm 7777.
Selecting an option that includes the letter “S” will play a PreCount (Song Pre-count Sound)
shuffle. 2S plays 2 6 and 4S plays 6767 . Specifies if a pre-count should sound (on) when playback of a
song file is started in the card mode (page E-137) or if a
pre-count should not sound (oFF*).
• The availability of the settings for this item depends on the
arpeggiator type. Refer to the separate “Appendix” for SongRepeat (Song Repeat Play)
details.
Specifies if a single song file should be repeat played (on)
during playback in the card mode (page E-137) or if a song file
ArpegPart (Arpeggiator Part) should not be repeat played (oFF*).
Specifies whether arpeggiator play with the tone of any part
should be used for the UPPER part keyboard or LOWER part AllData (All Data)
keyboard when the arpeggiator (page E-23) is used while the
You can batch save all user data in Digital Keyboard memory
keyboard is used while Layer and/or Split is turned on (page
to a memory card, or load all user data from a memory card to
E-15).
Digital Keyboard memory.
U12* : UPPER part keyboard, Upper 1 and Upper 2 tones
See “To batch save all Digital Keyboard data to a memory
played.
card” (page E-139) and “To batch load all Digital Keyboard
U1 : UPPER part keyboard, Upper 1 tone played.
memory data from a memory card” (page E-140) for more
U2 : UPPER part keyboard, Upper 2 tone played. information.
Low : LOWER part keyboard, Lower tone played.
• If “U2” is selected, arpeggios are played when Layer is on
CardFormat (Card Format)
(page E-16).
• If “Low” is selected, arpeggios are played when Split is on See “Formatting a Memory Card” (page E-137).
(page E-16).
E-132
FileDelete (File Delete) MIDI Group

See “To delete a file from a memory card” (page E-141).
FileRename (File Rename)

See “To rename a file on a memory card” (page E-141).
Volume (Volume) Group
KeyboardCh (Keyboard Channel)

Selects the channel for sending keyboard play MIDI data to an
external device (keyboard channel).
01* - 16
LocalCtrl (Local Control)

Specifies whether pressing a key sounds the internal sound
• For details about “parts” mentioned here, see “How Parts source (on*) or whether the keyboard and internal sound
are Organized” (page E-36). source should be disconnected (oFF).
AccompVol. (Auto Accompaniment Volume) AccompOut (Accompaniment MIDI Out)

Adjusts the Auto Accompaniment volume level (master Specifies if Auto Accompaniment MIDI data should be sent to
volume of parts A09 through A16). This setting does not affect an external device (on) or not sent to an external device
the keyboard volume level (parts A01 through A03). (oFF*).
000 - 115* - 127
General (Other) Group
SongVol. (Song Volume)
Adjusts the master volume of song file playback in the card
mode (page E-137). This setting does not affect the keyboard
volume level (parts A01 through A03) or Auto Accompaniment
volume level (parts A09 through A16).
000 - 127*
MetroVol. (Metronome Volume)

Adjusts the metronome volume. This setting is linked with the
A08 part volume (part volume) that can be adjusted with the
mixer (page E-36).
000 - 100* - 127 Speaker (Speaker ON/OFF)
Turns speaker output on or off.
AudioVol. (Audio Volume) Select “on*” to enable output from the Digital Keyboard’s
Adjusts volume when playing back an audio file with audio speakers or “oFF” to disable speaker output. Output continues
playback (page E-121). to be performed from the T-9 (PHONES) and T-8 (LINE OUT)
000 - 127* jacks even when “oFF” is selected for this setting.
A pointer indicator is displayed next to SP.OFF when “oFF” is
selected for this item.
Contrast (LCD Contrast)

Adjusts display contrast.
01 - 09* - 17
E-133
AutoPower (Auto Power Off) 4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select the
Specifies if Auto Power Off (page E-13) is enabled (on*) or operation you want.
disabled (oFF). Even when “on” is selected for this setting, To do this: Move the 0 here:
you can temporarily disable Auto Power Off by holding down
Return the power on default settings Clear
the L-3 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE) button as you press the
to the factory default settings (clearing
L-1 (POWER) button to turn on power.
default settings).
AutoResume (Auto Resume) Rewrite the power on default settings Store

with the Digital Keyboard’s current
Specifies whether the Digital Keyboard should remember its setup (registering default settings).
setup when turned off and restore it the next time it is turned
on. • For information about the setting items that are
oFF* : Restores power on defaults when power is turned on. registered as default settings, see “Parameter List”
on : Remembers setup when power is turned off and (page E-162).
restores it when power is turned back on.
• For information about the setting items that are restored • The message “Complete” appears and the display
when Auto Resume is enabled, see “Parameter List” (page returns to the screen before you pressed the R-16
E-162). (ENTER) button in step 3.
• Initially, power on default settings are the same as the
factory default settings. You also can use the procedure 6. To exit the function menu, press the R-13
below to specify other power on default settings to suit your (FUNCTION) button.
needs.
Default (Default Settings) • If you want the default settings to be restored whenever
power is turned on, select “oFF” for the “AutoResume”
You can use this setting item to do the following.
setting (page E-134).
• Rewrite the power on default settings with the Digital
Keyboard’s current setup (registering default settings).
• Return the power on default settings to the factory default
settings (clearing default settings).
■ To register or clear default settings
1. Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button to display

the function menu.
2. Use the R-17 (i, y) buttons to move the 0 to

“General” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.

“Default” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the default setting screen like the one
shown below.
E-134
Initialize (Initialize)
This item can be used to initialize all data and settings, or
parameter settings only.
• For information about what settings are initialized when

“Parameter” is selected for initialization in step 4 of the
procedure below, see “Parameter List” (page E-162).
■ To initialize all data and settings (or parameter

settings only)
1. Press the R-13 (FUNCTION) button to display

the function menu.

“General” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.

“Initialize” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This displays the initialize screen like the one shown
below.
4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to select either

“All” (all settings) or “Parameter” (parameter
settings only).
5. To execute initialization, press the R-16

(ENTER) button.
E-135
Using a Memory Card

C-9
R-16
R-17
R-14
R-13
C-17
You can save Digital Keyboard user area data to a memory • For information about saving and importing individual data
card and load data from a memory card to Digital Keyboard items, see “Saving Digital Keyboard Data to a Memory
memory. You also can play music files (MIDI files) stored on a Card” (page E-138) and “Loading Data from a Memory
memory card on the Digital Keyboard. Card” (page E-140).
• For details about saving and loading all data, see “To batch
save all Digital Keyboard data to a memory card” (page
E-139) and “To batch load all Digital Keyboard memory
• Use a memory card that satisfies the
data from a memory card” (page E-140).
conditions below.
Format: SDHC or SD
■ Data that can be directly played back from a
Capacity: 2GB to 32GB
Use of any memory cards other than
memory card
those defined above is not Description
Data Type
supported. (File Name Extension)
• SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. Song files SMF format 0 or 1 MIDI files (MID)
(page E-142)
Supported Data Types
Card and Card Slot Precautions
■ Data that can be saved to and exported from a
memory card • Be sure to observe the precautions provided in the
documentation that comes with the memory card.
Description
Data Type
(File Name Extension)
• Memory cards have a write-protect switch. Use it when you
want to protect the data on the card from accidental
User rhythm data Auto Accompaniment data edited
deletion.
(page E-103) with this Digital Keyboard (AC7)
• Avoid using a memory card under the following conditions.
User tone data Tone data edited with this Digital Such conditions can corrupt data stored on the memory
(page E-44) Keyboard (TN7)
card.
User drawbar organ tone data Drawbar organ tone data edited with – Areas subjected to high temperature, high humidity, or
(page E-52) this Digital Keyboard (DB7)
corrosive gas.
User DSP data DSP data edited with this Digital – Areas subjected to strong electrostatic charge and digital
(page E-33) Keyboard (DS7) noise.
User preset data Music preset data edited on this • Never touch the contacts of a memory card when loading it
(page E-58) Digital Keyboard (MPS) or removing it from the Digital Keyboard.
Song sequencer data Song data edited with this Digital • The message “Please Wait” will remain on the display while
(page E-68) Keyboard (CMS, MID*) a data save operation is in progress. Do not perform any
Registration data This Digital Keyboard’s panel other operation while it is displayed.
(page E-66) settings (RM7) Turning off the Digital Keyboard or removing the memory
All data All the above data (AL7)
card can cause Digital Keyboard data to be deleted or
become corrupted. It also can cause the Digital Keyboard
* Save only. to fail to turn on when the L-1 (POWER) button is pressed.
If this happens, refer to “Troubleshooting” (page E-150).
• Never insert anything besides a memory card into the card
slot. Doing so creates the risk of malfunction.
E-136
Using a Memory Card
• Electrostatic charge from your fingers or the memory card

to the card slot can cause malfunction of the Digital Entering the Card Mode
Keyboard. If this happens, turn the Digital Keyboard off and Enter the card mode when you want to perform memory card
then back on again.
operations.
• A memory card can become quite warm after very long use
• While in the rhythm mode (page E-7) press the C-9 (CARD)
in the card slot. This is normal and does not indicate button to enter the card mode.
malfunction.
Loading and Removing a Memory

Card
This will cause the : indicator to disappear from the
display and the ; indicator to appear.
• A memory card must be positioned correctly when
being loaded into the Digital Keyboard. Trying to force
an improperly oriented memory card into the slot can
damage the memory card and the slot.
1. With the top of the memory card facing

upwards (so you can see it), carefully insert it
into the Digital Keyboard’s SD card slot (T-1)
until stops with a click.
If the message “No Card” appears on the display, it means

there is no memory card in the card slot. For details about
what appears on the display while a card is loaded, see
“Playing a Music File from a Memory Card” (page E-142).
• To exit the card mode, press the C-9 (CARD) button again.
This will cause the ; indicator to disappear from the
display and the : indicator to appear.
Top
Formatting a Memory Card
2. To remove the memory card first press it into

• Format a memory card before using it for the first time.
the slot further.
• Before formatting a memory card, make sure it does
• This will cause the memory card to disengage and eject
not have any valuable data stored on it.
partially. Pull the memory card the rest of the way out of
• The memory card format operation performed by this
the slot.
Digital Keyboard is a “quick format”. If you want to
completely delete all of the data on the memory card,
format it on your computer or some other device.
1. Insert the memory card you want to format into

the Digital Keyboard’s card slot.
• Make sure the memory card is write-enabled. Check
the position of the card’s write-protect switch to ensure
it is not in the write-protect position.
2. Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card

mode.

• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.
E-137
Using a Memory Card
4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to 3. Depending on the type of data you want to save
“CardFormat”. to the memory card, perform one of the steps
shown below.
• All setup registration banks are saved as a batch. Other
data is saved in area (data item) units.
To save this
Do this:
type of data:
One user rhythm 1. Press the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS)
button.
specify the user rhythm number.
One user tone 1. Press the R-11 ([K] USER TONES)
5. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. button.
• This will display a value indicating the maximum 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
number of audio recordings that can be recorded. specify the user tone number.
One user 1. Press the R-12 ([L] DRAWBAR ORGAN)
6. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to specify the drawbar organ button.
number of audio recordings you want to format tone 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
the card for. specify the user drawbar organ tone
number (L:051 through L:100).
• You can format a 2GB card for up to 14 songs. A 4GB
to 32GB card can be formatted for up to 20 songs. One user DSP 1. Perform steps 1 through 4 under “To use
• An audio recording area of approximately 128MB is a DSP” (page E-32).
reserved on the memory card for each song. 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
• The minimum number of audio recordings you can specify the user DSP number (101
specify is 0 (which specifies the card will not be used through 200).
for storage of audio recordings). One user preset 1. While holding down the L-6 ([D] WORLD/
• The higher the number of audio recordings you specify VARIOUS) button, press the L-7 ([E]
here, the longer it will take to format the card. PIANO RHYTHMS) button to display the
music preset screen.
7. Press the R-14 (YES) button to format the 2. Press the L-8 ([F] USER RHYTHMS)
memory card or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel. button.
specify the user preset number.
while the format operation is being performed. Do not
perform any Digital Keyboard operation while this One song 1. Press the C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER)
message is on the display. “Complete” appears on the sequencer song button to enter the song sequencer mode.
display after formatting is complete. 2. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to
• Formatting may take as long as a few minutes to specify the song number.
complete. All registration Press the C-10 (BANK) button to display the
banks registration bank selection screen.
Saving Digital Keyboard Data to a 4. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
Memory Card button, press the C-9 (LOAD/SAVE) button.
• This causes an “Xxxx Load”*1 screen like the one
To save Digital Keyboard data to a memory shown below to appear. The sample screen below
shows the screen that appears from the rhythm screen.
card
1. Insert the memory card into the card slot.
2. If the Digital Keyboard is in the card mode,
press the C-9 (CARD) button to exit the card
mode.
E-138
Using a Memory Card
5. Press the R-17 (y) button to change to the

“Xxxx Save”*1 screen.
• Performing the above procedure to write a song sequencer
song to an SMF format file will save the data as SMF
Format 0 (16 channel) data. System track data A01 through
A16 are saved respectively to SMF 01CH through 16CH,
while song tracks 01 through 16 are saved respectively to
SMF 01CH through 16CH. Note that the save operation
gives priority to the data of tracks 01 through 16. If there is
data in any of the tracks 01 through 16 and “on” is selected
for the “Part” (part on/off) setting of a track that contains
data, the system track data (A01 through A16) for the same
numbered track data will not be saved. Also, the note
• To save a song sequencer song in SMF format, press
events of tracks that are turned off using the mixer are not
the R-17 (y) button one more time here to display the
saved.
“Seq SmfSave” screen. You can switch between the
“Xxxx Load”, “Seq Save”, and “Seq SmfSave” screens
using the R-17 (t, y) buttons. To batch save all Digital Keyboard data to a
memory card
6. Enter the file name to assign to the data when it
is stored. 1. Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card
Change the initial default file name “USERNAME.xxx” *2 mode.
as described below.
(1) Use the R-17 (u, i) buttons to move the cursor to 2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
the character you want to change. button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.
(2) Use the dial or the R-14 (–, +) buttons to change the • This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.
character.
• The characters you can select are shown below. 3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
“AllData” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 button.
A B C D E F G H I J
4. When the “All Load” screen appears, use the
K L M N O P Q R S T R-17 (y) button to change to the “All Save”
U V W X Y Z S & _ ' screen.
( ) - ^ { } @ ~ `


appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to save or
*1 The “Xxxx” part of the file name depends the type of • The remainder of the steps are the same as those from
data you are saving. step 6 under “To save Digital Keyboard data to a
*2 The “xxx” part of the file name is a file name extension memory card” (page E-138).
that depends the type of data you are saving.
E-139
Using a Memory Card
■ Memory card Data Storage 7. In response to the “Sure?” message that

The above procedure stores Digital Keyboard data in a folder appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to load or
named MUSICDAT on the memory card. the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
• The MUSICDAT folder is created automatically when you
format the memory card on the Digital Keyboard (page * The “Xxxx” part of the file name depends the type of data
E-137). on the memory card.
• Note that files not in the MUSICDAT folder cannot be
loaded, deleted, or renamed by this Digital Keyboard. You To batch load all Digital Keyboard memory
also will not be able to load or delete any file stored in any data from a memory card
subfolder inside the MUSICDAT folder.
Loading Data from a Memory mode.
Card 2. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.
• Make sure that all of the data you want to load is in the
MUSICDAT folder on the memory card. 3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to
“AllData” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
To load data to Digital Keyboard memory button.
from a memory card • This displays the “All Load” screen.
• The remainder of the steps are the same as those from
1. Insert the memory card into the card slot. step 5 under “To load data to Digital Keyboard memory
from a memory card” (page E-140).
2. If the Digital Keyboard is in the card mode,
press the C-9 (CARD) button to exit the card
mode.
3. Referring to the table in step 3 of the procedure

under “To save Digital Keyboard data to a
memory card” (page E-138), perform the
procedure required for the type of data you
want to load from the card.
• All setup registration banks are loaded as a batch.
Other data is loaded in area (data item) units.

button, press the C-9 (LOAD/SAVE) button.
• This causes an “Xxxx Load”* screen like the one shown
below to appear. The sample screen below shows the
screen that appears from the rhythm screen.
5. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to display the

file you want to import.
E-140
Using a Memory Card
To delete a file from a memory To rename a file on a memory

card card
1. Insert the memory card into the card slot. 1. Insert the memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card 2. Press the C-9 (CARD) button to enter the card
mode. mode.
3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION) 3. While holding down the R-13 (FUNCTION)
button, press the C-17 (MENU) button. button, press the C-17 (MENU) button.
• This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen. • This displays the function menu “Play/CardUtl” screen.
4. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0 to 4. Use the R-17 (i, y) buttons to move the 0 to
“FileDelete” and then press the R-16 (ENTER) “FileRename” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button. button.
• This displays a screen for specifying the file to be • This displays a screen for specifying the file to be
deleted. renamed.
5. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to display the

file you want to rename.

7. After the name is the way you want, press the

5. Use the dial or R-14 (–, +) buttons to display the R-16 (ENTER) button.
file you want to delete.
6. Press the R-16 (ENTER) button. appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to rename
the file or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel.
7. In response to the “Sure?” message that • Pressing the R-14 (YES) button displays the message
appears, press the R-14 (YES) button to delete “Please Wait” (indicating the operation is in progress).
or the R-14 (NO) button to cancel. Do not perform any operation while this message is on
• Pressing the R-14 (YES) button displays the message the display. “Complete” appears on the display after the
“Please Wait” (indicating the operation is in progress). operation is complete.
Do not perform any operation while this message is on
the display. “Complete” appears on the display after the
operation is complete.
E-141
Using a Memory Card
L-7 L-8 C-9
R-16
R-17
R-14
L-12 L-14 L-16

L-13 L-15 L-17

Playing a Music File from a music file you want to play.
Memory Card
You can use the Digital Keyboard to play music files you
saved to a memory card with your computer.
• Supported music files are SMF format 0 or 1 MIDI files

(MID).
• Playback of audio files (WAV, MP3, etc.) is not
supported.
• Data Manager computer software (page E-146) can be
used to convert WAV format files to a format that can 6. To start playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)
be played back by the Digital Keyboard. For details,
button.
refer to the Data Manager user’s guide.
• To perform a fast forward operation, hold down the
L-14 (dFF) button. The measure number in the lower
right corner of the display scrolls at high speed while
• At the same time playback starts, the transpose setting the L-14 (dFF) is depressed. Releasing the button
(page E-18) will change to 00 and the local control setting immediately resumes normal playback from that point.
(page E-133) will change to “on”. • To perform a fast backward operation, hold down the
L-13 (sREW) button. Sound is muted and the
To play a music file from a memory card measure number in the lower right corner of the display
scrolls at high speed while the L-13 (sREW) is
1. Format the memory card on the Digital depressed. Releasing the button immediately resumes
Keyboard (page E-137). normal playback from the beginning of the measure
• This will cause a folder named MUSICDAT to be whose number is displayed.
automatically created in the memory card root • Pressing the L-15 (PAUSE) button pauses playback.
directory. Press again to resume playback.
2. Use your computer to copy the music file you 7. To stop playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)
want to play to the MUSICDAT folder that was button.
created in step 1.
• See the “Important!” note above for information about
supported file types.
3. Insert the memory card into the card slot.

mode.
E-142
Using a Memory Card
Turning Off One Hand Part and Playing the 6. Press the L-17 (PART SELECT) button to exit
Other Hand Part on the Keyboard (Part Off) the part on/off screen.
When playing a music file of a piano piece that has the left 7. To start playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)
hand and the right hand parts recorded in separate MIDI button.
channels, you can turn off playback of one of the parts and
• This starts playback of the part you turned on in step 3.
play it on the keyboard along with playback of the other part.
1. Enter the card mode and select the MIDI file you 8. To stop playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)
button.
want to play.
2. Press the L-17 (PART SELECT) button.

• This displays a “Part Select” screen like the one shown • The part on/off setting reverts to the initial default (both
below, with the 0 next to “Part L”. parts on) whenever you select a different music file.
3. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0

between “Part L” (left-hand part) and “Part R”
(right-hand part), and the dial or R-14 (–, +)
buttons to turn the currently selected part on or
off.

“SelectCh” and then press the R-16 (ENTER)
button.
• This causes the screen shown below to appear.
5. Use the R-17 (t, y) buttons to move the 0

between “Part L” (left-hand part) and “Part R”
(right-hand part), and the dial or R-14 (–, +)
buttons to specify the MIDI channel for
currently selected part.
E-143
Using a Memory Card
Playing on the Keyboard Along with To repeat play a specific section of a song
Playback of a Music File on a memory card
1. Enter the card mode and select the MIDI file you
You can perform the following operations and play on the want to play.
keyboard along with playback of a music file on a memory
card. 2. Press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button to start
• Select UPPER 1 part, UPPER 2 part, and LOWER part
tones.
playback.
• Specify layer, split on/off, and the split point
3. When playback reaches the measure you want
The procedures for performing these operations are the same to specify as the repeat start point, press the
as those performed in the rhythm mode. For details about the L-12 (REPEAT) button.
operation, see “Layering and Splitting Tones” (page E-15).
• The ? indicator will be flashing on the display.
You also can use the procedure below to easily assign the 4. When playback reaches the measure you want
same tone as the right-hand part or left-hand part of the music
file to the keyboard (UPPER 1 part tone) for manual play.
to specify as the repeat end point, press the
■ To assign the same tone as the right-hand part or • The ? indicator will stop flashing and repeat
left-hand part of the music file to the keyboard playback of the measures within the range you
specified in steps 3 and 4 will start.
1. Perform the procedure under “Turning Off One • The repeat range is from the beginning of the measure
Hand Part and Playing the Other Hand Part on you specified in step 3 to the end of the measure you
the Keyboard (Part Off)” (page E-143) to turn off specified in step 4.
• If you do not specify an end point, the end of the song
the part you want to play on the keyboard. will be the end point.
• This step is not required if you want to play along on the
keyboard while playing back both hand parts. 5. To stop playback, press the L-16 (PLAY/STOP)
button.
2. While holding down the L-7 ([E] PIANO
• Pressing the L-16 (PLAY/STOP) button again will
RHYTHMS) button, press the L-8 ([F] USER restart repeat playback using the same start and end
RHYTHMS) button. points.
• This assigns the tone of the part that is turned off to the • The repeat range is cleared when you select a different
UPPER 1 part. music file.
• If both parts are on or off, the right-hand part of the
music file is assigned to the UPPER 1 part. To change the playback tempo
3. This starts playback of the music file. Play the See “To change the tempo setting” (page E-19).
part you want on the keyboard.
To adjust playback volume in accordance
with keyboard play volume
See “SongVol. (Song Volume)” (page E-133). For information
about how to configure settings, see “To change the setting of
a function menu item” (page E-130).
To sound a pre-count at the start of playback

See “PreCount (Song Pre-count Sound)” (page E-132). For
information about how to configure settings, see “To change
the setting of a function menu item” (page E-130).
E-144
Connecting to a Computer
You can connect the Digital Keyboard to a computer and 2. After starting up your computer, use a
exchange MIDI data between them. You can send play data commercially available USB cable to connect it
from the Digital Keyboard to music software running on your
to the Digital Keyboard.
computer, or you can send MIDI data from your computer to
the Digital Keyboard for playback. B connector
Minimum Computer System USB cable

(A-B type)
Requirements Digital Keyboard USB jack
The following shows the minimum computer system A connector
requirements for sending and receiving MIDI data. Check to
make sure that your computer complies with these
requirements before connecting the Digital Keyboard to it. Computer USB port
• Operating System
Windows® XP (SP2 or later) *1 3. Turn on the Digital Keyboard.
Windows Vista® *2 • If this is the first time you are connecting the Digital
Windows® 7 *3 Keyboard to your computer, the driver software
Windows® 8 *4 required to send and receive data will be installed on
Windows® 8.1 *5 your computer automatically.
Mac OS® X (10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5.X, 10.6.X, 10.7.X,
10.8.X, 10.9.X) 4. Start up your computer’s music software.
*1: Windows XP Home Edition
Windows XP Professional (32-bit)
5. Configure the music software settings to select
*2: Windows Vista (32-bit) one of the following as the MIDI device.
*3: Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit) CASIO USB-MIDI : For Windows 8.1, Windows 8,
*4: Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit) Windows 7, Windows Vista,
*5: Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit) Mac OS X
USB Audio Device : For Windows XP
• USB port • For information about how to select the MIDI device,
see the user documentation that comes with the music
software you are using.
• Never connect to a computer that does not conform to
the above requirements. Doing so can cause problems
with your computer. • Be sure to turn on the Digital Keyboard first before
starting up your computer’s music software.
Connecting the Digital Keyboard to Your
Computer
• Once you are able to connect successfully for the first time,
there is no problem with leaving the USB cable connected
when you turn off your computer and/or Digital Keyboard.
• Make sure you follow the steps of the procedure below • You can alter the Digital Keyboard’s MIDI setup by
exactly. Connecting incorrectly can make data send changing the MIDI data send channel or other settings. For
and receive impossible. details, see “MIDI Group” under “Function Menu Settings”
(page E-131).
1. Turn off the Digital Keyboard and then start up • For information about the relationship between each Digital
your computer. Keyboard part (page E-36) and the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT
• Do not start up the music software on your computer channels, see “Assigning a MIDI Channel to Each Part”
yet! (page E-161).
• This Digital Keyboard conforms to General MIDI Level 1
(GM).
• For detailed specifications and connections that apply to
MIDI data send and receive by this Digital Keyboard, see
the latest support information provided by the website at the
following URL.
http://world.casio.com/
B
E-145
Storing and Loading Digital Using Rhythm (Auto

Keyboard Memory Data Accompaniment) Data from
You can transfer song sequencer songs, user rhythms, and another Model
other data in Digital Keyboard memory to a computer for
You can use the procedures in this section to import and use
storage. You also can load Auto Accompaniment data you
rhythm data from another model.
download from the CASIO website to the Digital Keyboard,
which greatly expands the Auto Accompaniment patterns
available to you. A special Data Manager application is Rhythm Data Compatibility
required in order to transfer data to and from the Digital
Keyboard.
• You may experience some abnormalities when trying to
Data Types Supported for Data Transfer play back rhythm data created for another model.
Downloading Data Manager • Note that some of the models described below are
available only in certain geographic locations.
The same types of data that you can store to or recall from a
memory card (page E-136) can be transferred to and from the 1 Models whose rhythm data is compatible with the
Digital Keyboard. Digital Keyboard
Rhythm data (filename extension: ac7) of the models
To download Data Manager below can be imported to the Digital Keyboard and used
as-is.
1. Go to the CASIO WORLDWIDE site at the Conversely, rhythm data from this Digital Keyboard can be
used on these models.
following URL.
http://world.casio.com/ AP-6/620
AT-3/5
2. At the site, select a geographic area or country. CDP-200R/220R
CTK-4000/4200/5000/5000SK/5300/6000/6200/6300/
3. After accessing the area site, navigate to the 7000/7200/7300
minimum computer system requirements for PX-330
WK-200/210/220/225/330/500/6500/6600/7500/7600
Data Manager for this product.
• You should be able to find a link to Data Manager 2 Models whose rhythm data can be used as-is on the
information on the product introduction page of this Digital Keyboard
product. If you cannot find such a link, use the search Rhythm data (filename extensions: z00 and ckf) of the
form of the area site where you are located to enter the models below can be imported to the Digital Keyboard and
model name of this product and search for it. used as-is. Rhythm data for these models can be
• Note that site contents are subject to change without downloaded from the CASIO MUSIC SITE
notice. (http://music.casio.com/).
4. Check if your computer system complies with CTK-671/691/900

the minimum requirements for Data Manager. PX-410R/575R
WK-3000/3200/3300/3500/3700/3800/8000
5. Download Data Manager and its user’s guide to Rhythm data from this Digital Keyboard cannot be used on
your computer. these models.
6. Follow the procedure in the user’s guide that 3 Models whose rhythm data can be used on the Digital
you downloaded in step 5 to install and use Keyboard following conversion
Rhythm data (filename extensions: cpt and ept) can be
Data Manager.
imported to the Digital Keyboard and used after it is
converted with Rhythm Converter to compatible data
(described in 2 above). Rhythm Converter can be
downloaded from the CASIO MUSIC SITE
(http://music.casio.com/).
CTK-731/738/811
WK-1800
Rhythm data from this Digital Keyboard cannot be used on
these models.
E-146
Importing and Transferring Rhythm Data To load rhythm data into Digital Keyboard
from Other Models memory
You can transfer rhythm data from other models by loading it Perform one of the procedures below, depending on the type
from a memory card, or by using Data Manager to transfer the of data you want to load.
data from a computer to Digital Keyboard memory. For
If the data is on
information about actual operations, see “Importing Data from this type of Do this:
Various Storage Media” (page E-147). media:
Computer local 1. Perform the procedure under “To download
disk Data Manager” (page E-146).
• Note that rhythm data from some models needs to be • For details about how to transfer data from
the computer to the Digital Keyboard, see
converted before it can be used on this Digital Keyboard. the user documentation that comes with
For more information, see “Rhythm Data Compatibility” Data Manager.
(page E-146). Or:
1. Copy the data from your computer’s local disk
to the MUSICDAT folder on a 2GB to 32GB
Importing Data from Various capacity memory card that has been formatted
on the Digital Keyboard.
Storage Media 2. Perform the procedure under “To load data to
Digital Keyboard memory from a memory card”
(page E-140).
The procedure you need to use to import or transfer rhythm
data to Digital Keyboard memory depends on the media 2GB to 32GB 1. Depending on the location of the data on the
(computer local disk, memory card) where the data is capacity memory memory card, perform either of the following
card operations.
currently stored. This section explains each of the required • If the data is in the MUSICDAT folder on the
procedures. memory card, advance directly to step 2 of
• For details about Data Manager, see “Storing and Loading this procedure.
Digital Keyboard Memory Data” (page E-146). • If the data is not in the MUSICDAT folder on
the memory card, move it to the MUSICDAT
• For information about the types of memory cards supported folder. If there is no MUSICDAT folder on the
by the Digital Keyboard, see “Using a Memory Card” (page memory card, create a new folder in the
E-136). memory card’s root directory and name it
MUSICDAT. Next, move the data to the
folder.
2. Perform the procedure under “To load data to
(page E-140).
Unsupported 1. Copy the data on the memory card to the
memory card computer’s local disk.
(capacity less 2. Copy the data in step 1 from the computer’s
than 2GB, etc.) local disk to the MUSICDAT folder of a memory
card (2GB to 32GB card) that was formatted on
the Digital Keyboard.
3. Perform the procedure under “To load data to
(page E-140).
Or:
1. Copy the data on the memory card to the
computer’s local disk.
2. Perform the procedure under “To download
Data Manager” (page E-146).
• For details about how to transfer data from
the computer to the Digital Keyboard, see
the user documentation that comes with
Data Manager.
E-147
Reference
Error Messages
Display
Cause Required Action
Message
Format 1. The current memory card format is not compatible 1. Format the memory card on the Digital Keyboard
with this Digital Keyboard. (page E-137).
2. The memory card capacity is greater than 32GB. 2. Use a memory card with a capacity between 2GB
and 32GB.
3. You are trying to use an SDXC card. 3. SDXC cards not supported. Use an SD or SDHC
memory card.
4. There is something wrong with the memory card. 4. Use a different memory card.
Card Full There is not enough room available on the memory Delete some of the files on the memory card to make
card. room for new data (page E-141), or use a different
card.
Card R/W Memory card data is corrupted. Use a different memory card.
No Card 1. The memory card is not loaded correctly in the 1. Correctly load the memory card into the card slot.
Digital Keyboard’s card slot.
2. The memory card was removed while some 2. Do not remove the memory card while any
operation was in progress. operation is in progress.
No Data 1. You tried to save a Digital Keyboard user area 1. Select a user area that contains data.
(user rhythm, user rhythm song, etc.) that does not
contain any data to the memory card.
2. You are attempting to play back an audio file that 2. Select an audio file whose number has an asterisk
does not contain any data. (*) next to it, which indicates that it contains
recorded data.
No File 1. There is no MUSICDAT folder (page E-140) on the 1. Create a MUSICDAT folder on the memory card or
memory card. format the memory card on the Digital Keyboard
(page E-137).
2. There is no loadable or playable data in the 2. Move the file you want to load or play into the
MUSICDAT folder. memory card’s MUSICDAT folder.
Not SMF0/1 You are attempting to play back SMF Format 2 file. This Digital Keyboard supports playback of SMF
Format 0 or Format 1 only.
Protect The memory card is write-protected. Use the memory card’s write protect switch to enable
writing.
Read Only A read-only file with the same name you are trying to • Use a different name to save the new file.
use is already stored on the memory card. • Remove the read-only attribute from the existing
file and overwrite it with the new file.
• Use a different memory card.
Size Over 1. The data on the memory card is too big to play. 1. This Digital Keyboard supports playback of song
data files with a maximum size of about 320KB.
2. The data you are trying to load is too large. 2. The following is the approximate maximum data
sizes (per data item) when loading data into Digital
Keyboard memory.
User rhythm: 32KB
Song sequencer song: 159KB
User preset: 8KB
A total of approximately 128KB of user presets
(total of all 100 user presets) can be loaded.
Wrong Data 1. The memory card data is corrupted. Use a different memory card.
2. The memory card contains data that is not
supported by this Digital Keyboard.
E-148
Reference
Display
Cause Required Action
Message
Meas. Limit You tried to perform an operation during song Make sure your edits do not cause the number of
sequencer song editing or user music preset editing measures to exceed the 999-measure limit.
that would cause the number of measures in the song
or chord progression to exceed 999.
Memory Full 1. There is not enough memory capacity required for 1. To record new data of some part of some
pattern sequencer operations. accompaniment pattern, clear another part and/or
another accompaniment patterns. If you want to
use Easy Edit, select a different rhythm from the
one that was selected when the error message
appeared.
2. Remaining memory capacity became too low 2. Referring to “To clear user preset data” (page
during music preset editing. E-59), delete user presets you no longer need in
order to free up memory.
3. There is not enough memory capacity required for 3. Delete other tracks and/or songs to free up memory
song sequencer operations. space.
File Name When renaming a file on a memory card, attempting Use a different name.
to specify a file name that is already used.
Card Size Memory card capacity is not enough for audio Use a memory card with a capacity at least 2GB.
recording and playback.
Write Error! Writing to internal storage memory failed. Try again.
E-149
Reference
Troubleshooting
Symptom Action
Included Accessories
I can’t find something that should be Carefully check inside all of the packing materials.
included with the product.
Power Requirements
Power will not turn on. • Check the AC adaptor or make sure that the batteries are facing correctly (page
E-9).
• Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page
E-9).
• You may have tried to perform some operation while the “Please Wait” message
was displayed, which caused an internal problem. If other measures do not
correct this problem, perform the operation below to turn on power.
Warning!
The following operation will delete all Digital Keyboard data and return all
settings to their initial factory defaults.
While holding down the R-2 ([B] E.PIANO) and R-5 ([E] STRINGS) buttons,
press the L-1 (POWER) button to turn on power.
The display lights up momentarily but Press the L-1 (POWER) button firmly and completely to turn on power.
power does not turn on when I press the
L-1 (POWER) button.
The Digital Keyboard outputs a loud sound Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page
and then suddenly powers down. E-9).
The Digital Keyboard suddenly powers This happens when Auto Power Off (page E-13) is triggered.
down after a few minutes.
Display
The display keeps going out or is flashing. Replace the batteries with new ones or switch over to AC adaptor power (page
E-9).
Screen contents are visible only from This is due to production limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.
straight ahead.
Sound
Nothing happens when I press any • Adjust the volume setting (page E-13).
keyboard key. • Check if something is plugged into the T-9 (PHONES) jack on the back of the
Digital Keyboard.
• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all keyboard settings (page E-13).
Nothing happens or notes do not play Press the L-17 (ACCOMP ON/OFF) button to disable chord input with chord
normally when I play on the left side of the keyboard (page E-24).
keyboard.
Nothing happens when I start an Auto • With rhythms E:030 to E:039, nothing will sound until you play a chord on the
Accompaniment. keyboard. Try playing a chord (page E-26).
• Check and adjust the accompaniment volume setting (page E-133).
• If there is no user rhythm stored in memory, Auto Accompaniment will not start
when you press the L-16 (START/STOP) button while a rhythm in the range of
F:001 to F:100 is selected (page E-24).
• Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page
E-13).
The metronome does not sound. • Check and adjust the metronome volume setting (page E-133).
E-13).
E-150
Reference
Symptom Action
Notes keep sounding, without stopping. • Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page
E-13).
E-9).
Some notes are cut off while they are Notes are cut off whenever the number of notes being sounded exceeds the
playing. maximum polyphony value of 64 (21 to 32 for some tones). This does not indicate
malfunction.
The volume or tone setting I configured • Adjust the volume setting (page E-13).
has changed. • Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page
E-13).
E-9).
Output volume does not change even • Change the Touch Response setting (page E-131).
though I change my keyboard pressure. • Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page
E-13).
In certain keyboard ranges, the volume This is due to system limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.
and tone quality sound are slightly
different from those in other keyboard
ranges.
With some tones, octaves do not change This is due to system limitations. It does not indicate malfunction.
at the far ends of the keyboard.
The pitch of the notes does not match • When the B indicator is displayed, it means that the transpose setting
other accompanying instruments or (page E-18) has been used to change the pitch of the keyboard. Return the
sounds strange when played along with transpose setting to 00.
other instruments. • When the C indicator is displayed, it means that the scale setting (page
E-21) has been used to change the Digital Keyboard’s initial default setting. Use
the procedure under “To select a preset scale” (page E-21) to change to the
“Equal” preset scale.
E-13).
The reverb of notes seems to change • Check and adjust the reverb setting (page E-31).
suddenly. • Turn power off and then back on to initialize all Digital Keyboard settings (page
E-13).
Operation
Tone, rhythm, and other settings revert to The Digital Keyboard may be configured to restore default settings (factory default
their initial defaults whenever you turn on settings or settings registered by you) when power is turned on. If you want the
the Digital Keyboard. Digital Keyboard to remember its last setup and restore it the next time it is turned
on, select “on” for the Auto Resume setting (page E-134).
Computer Connection
I can’t exchange data between the Digital • Check to make sure that the USB cable is connected to the Digital Keyboard and
Keyboard and a computer. computer, and that the device is selected correctly with your computer’s music
software settings (page E-145).
• Turn off the Digital Keyboard and then exit the music software on your computer.
Next, turn the Digital Keyboard back on and then restart the music software on
your computer.
E-151
Reference
Specifications
Models CTK-7200/WK-7600
Keyboard CTK-7200: 61 standard-size keys
WK-7600: 76 standard-size keys
Touch Response 2 types, Off
Maximum Polyphony 64 notes (32 for certain tones, 21 for drawbar organ tones)
Tones
Built-in Tones 820
User Tones Up to 100 (Tone Editor), up to 50 (Drawbar Edit)
Functions Layer, Split
Drawbar Organ
Drawbars 9 sliders (16', 5 1/3', 8', 4', 2 2/3', 2', 1 3/5', 1 1/3', 1')
Percussion Second/Third
Click On/Off
Rotary Effect Fast/Slow
Reverb 1 to 10, Off
Chorus 1 to 5
DSP
Preset DSP 100
User DSP Up to 100
Metronome
Beats per Measure 0, 2 to 6
Tempo Range 30 to 255
Auto Accompaniment
Built-in Rhythms 260
User Rhythms Up to 100 (Pattern Sequencer)
Demo Songs 5 songs
Registration 96 (6 setups × 16 banks)
Song Sequencer Real-time recording, playback
Punch-in recording
Keyboard Play 5 songs, 17 tracks
Memory Capacity Approximately 30,000 notes (total for 5 songs)
Audio Recording and Playback
Functions
Requirement An SD or SDHC memory card, 2GB to 32GB
Recording Recording of keyboard play, song sequencer song playback, sound input from MIC IN jack
and INST IN jack
Up to 20 audio files (maximum recording time: approximately 13 minutes for a single audio
file)
Playback Up to 999 files (including files used for recording)
Mixer 32 parts (A01-A16/B01-B16)
Master parameters, DSP parameters, Part parameters, MIC/INST parameters
Other Functions
Transpose ±1 octaves (–12 to +12 semitones)
Octave Shift UPPER 1/UPPER 2/LOWER ±2 octaves
Tuning A4 = 415.5 - 440.0 - 465.9 Hz
Scale Tuning Scale Fine Tune, Preset Scales
Music Preset 305 built-in, plus 100 user presets
One Touch Preset 260
Auto Harmonize 12 types
Arpeggiator 150 types
Equalizer 5 presets
E-152
Reference
MIDI 16 multi-timbre received, GM Level 1 standard

Pitch Bend Wheel
Pitch Bend Range 0 to 24 semitones
Memory Cards
Supported Memory Cards SD or SDHC memory cards, 2GB to 32GB
Functions SMF playback, file storage, file recall, file delete, card format
Inputs/Outputs
USB jack TYPE B
Sustain/Assignable jack Standard jack (sustain, sostenuto, soft, start/stop)
Phones jack Stereo standard jack
Line Out R, L/MONO jacks Standard jack × 2
Output Impedance: 2.3kΩ, Output Voltage: 1.5V (RMS) MAX
Audio In jack Stereo mini jack
Input Impedance: 9kΩ, Input Sensitivity: 200mV
Inst In Jack Standard jack
Mic In jack Standard jack (connect a dynamic microphone only)
Power Jack 12V DC
Power Supply 2-way
Batteries 6 D-size zinc-carbon batteries or alkaline batteries
Battery Life Approximately 4 hours continuous operation on alkaline batteries
AC Adaptor AD-A12150LW
Auto Power Off Approximately 6 minutes after last key operation during battery use,
approximately 4 hours after last key operation during AC adaptor use. Auto Power Off can be
disabled.
Speakers 12 cm × 2 + 3 cm × 2 (Output: 7.0W + 7.0W)
Power Consumption 12V = 18W
Dimensions CTK-7200: 94.8 × 38.4 × 12.2 cm (37 3/8 × 15 1/8 × 4 13/16 inch)
WK-7600: 116.1 × 38.5 × 14.7 cm (45 3/4 × 15 3/16 × 5 13/16 inch)
Weight CTK-7200: Approximately 6.7kg (14.8 lbs) (without batteries)
WK-7600: Approximately 8.3kg (18.3 lbs) (without batteries)
• Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
E-153
Reference
Operating Precautions
Be sure to read and observe the following operating
precautions.
■ Location
Avoid the following locations for this product.
• Areas exposed to direct sunlight and high humidity
• Areas subjected to temperature extremes
• Near a radio, TV, video deck, or tuner
The above devices will not cause malfunction of the
product, but the product can cause interference in the audio
or video of a nearby device.
■ User Maintenance
• Never use benzine, alcohol, thinner, or other chemical
agents to clean the product.
• To clean the product or its keyboard, wipe with a soft cloth
moistened in a weak solution of water and a mild neutral
detergent. Wring all excess moisture from the cloth before
wiping.
■ Included and Optional Accessories

Use only accessories that are specified for use with this
product. Use of unauthorized accessories creates the risk of
fire, electric shock, and personal injury.
■ AC Adaptor Handling Precautions

• Use a power outlet that is easily accessible so you can
unplug the AC adaptor when a malfunction occurs or
whenever else you need to do so.
• The AC adaptor is intended for indoor use only. Do not use
it where it might be exposed to splashing or moisture. Do
not place any container, such as a flower vase, that
contains liquid on the AC adaptor.
• Store the AC adaptor in a dry place.
• Use the AC adaptor in an open, well-ventilated area.
• Never cover the AC adaptor with newspaper, a table cloth,
a curtain, or any other similar item.
• Unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet if you do not
plan to use the product for a long time.
• Never try to repair the AC adaptor or modify it in any way.
• AC adaptor operating environment
Temperature: 0 to 40°C
Humidity: 10% to 90% RH
• Output polarity: &
■ Weld Lines
Lines may be visible on the exterior of the product. These are
“weld lines” that result from the plastic molding process. They
are not cracks or scratches.
■ Musical Instrument Etiquette

Always be aware of others around you whenever using this
product. Be especially careful when playing late at night to
keep the volume at levels that do not disturb others. Other
steps you can take when playing late at night are closing
windows and using headphones.
E-154
Reference
DSP Effect List

Preset DSP List
The table below shows the preset DSPs that can be selected by the procedure under “To use a DSP” (page E-32).
• The “Number” column shows DSP numbers, while the “Screen Name” shows the DSP name that appears on the display.
• The DSPs of this Digital Keyboard consist of the 46 “types” shown in the “DSP Type List” (page E-156). A preset DSP is a
variation that is derived from one of these 46 types.
Number Screen Name Type Number Number Screen Name Type Number
001 Comp 1 02 051 RefPan 1 42
002 Comp 2 02 052 RefPan 2 42
003 Enhance1 04 053 Rotary 1 12
004 Enhance2 04 054 Rotary 2 12
005 Phaser 1 07 055 Rotary 3 12
006 Phaser 2 07 056 Rotary 4 12
007 Phaser 3 07 057 Rotary 5 12
008 Chorus 1 09 058 Wah 1 01
009 Chorus 2 09 059 Wah 2 01
010 Chorus 3 09 060 Wah 3 01
011 Chorus 4 09 061 Wah 4 01
012 Chorus 5 09 062 CmpWah 22
013 CmpCho 1 24 063 WahCho 1 17
014 CmpCho 2 24 064 WahCho 2 17
015 RefCho 41 065 WahFln 1 18
016 Flanger1 08 066 WahFln 2 18
017 Flanger2 08 067 WahDst 1 16
018 Flanger3 08 068 WahDst 2 16
019 Flanger4 08 069 WahTrm 1 20
020 CmpFln 25 070 WahTrm 2 20
021 Delay 1 10 071 WahPan 1 21
022 Delay 2 10 072 WahPan 2 21
023 Delay 3 10 073 WahRef 1 19
024 Delay 4 10 074 WahRef 2 19
025 Delay 5 10 075 WahCmp 1 15
026 Reflect1 11 076 WahCmp 2 15
027 Reflect2 11 077 Dist 1 03
028 Reflect3 11 078 Dist 2 03
029 CmpRef 26 079 Dist 3 03
030 ChoRef 1 36 080 DstCmp 30
031 ChoRef 2 36 081 CmpDst 23
032 ChoRef 3 36 082 DstTrm 1 34
033 FlnRef 1 38 083 DstTrm 2 34
034 FlnRef 2 38 084 DstPan 1 35
035 FlnRef 3 38 085 DstPan 2 35
036 Tremolo 6 086 DstCho 1 31
037 CmpTrm 27 087 DstCho 2 31
038 TrmRef 46 088 DstFln 1 32
039 TrmCho 1 44 089 DstFln 2 32
040 TrmCho 2 44 090 DstFln 3 32
041 TrmFln 1 45 091 DstWah 1 29
042 TrmFln 2 45 092 DstWah 2 29
043 TrmDst 1 43 093 DstWah 3 29
044 TrmDst 2 43 094 DstWah 4 29
045 AutoPan 05 095 DstRef 33
046 CmpPan 28 096 RefDst 40
047 ChoPan 1 37 097 Lo-Fi 14
048 ChoPan 2 37 098 RingMod1 13
049 FlnPan 1 39 099 RingMod2 13
050 FlnPan 2 39 100 RingMod3 13
E-155
Reference
DSP Type List

All of the Digital Keyboard’s preset DSPs belong to one of the DSP types shown in the table below. When creating a user DSP
(page E-33) or when using the tone editor (page E-44) to edit the DSP applied to a tone, you need to select one of the DSP types
in the table.
• Type numbers 01 through 14 are single type DSPs, while numbers 15 through 46 are dual type DSPs. A single type DSP is one
with a single structure, while a dual type is a combination of two single type DSPs.
• The name of a dual DSP is formed by its two constituent single DSP names, in the order that they are applied. For example, type
15 named “Wah-Compressor” connects in line to “Wah” and “Compressor”, in that sequence.
Type Number DSP Type Name Screen Name Type Number DSP Type Name Screen Name
01 Wah Wah 24 Compressor-Chorus CmpCho
02 Compressor Comp 25 Compressor-Flanger CmpFln
03 Distortion Dist 26 Compressor-Reflection CmpRef
04 Enhancer Enhance 27 Compressor-Tremolo CmpTrm
05 AutoPan AutoPan 28 Compressor-AutoPan CmpPan
06 Tremolo Tremolo 29 Distortion-Wah DstWah
07 Phaser Phaser 30 Distortion-Compressor DstCmp
08 Flanger Flanger 31 Distortion-Chorus DstCho
09 Chorus Chorus 32 Distortion-Flanger DstFln
10 Delay Delay 33 Distortion-Reflection DstRef
11 Reflection Reflect 34 Distortion-Tremolo DstTrm
12 Rotary Rotary 35 Distortion-AutoPan DstPan
13 RingModulator RingMod 36 Chorus-Reflection ChoRef
14 Lo-Fi Lo-Fi 37 Chorus-AutoPan ChoPan
15 Wah-Compressor WahCmp 38 Flanger-Reflection FlnRef
16 Wah-Distortion WahDst 39 Flanger-AutoPan FlnPan
17 Wah-Chorus WahCho 40 Reflection-Distortion RefDst
18 Wah-Flanger WahFln 41 Reflection-Chorus RefCho
19 Wah-Reflection WahRef 42 Reflection-AutoPan RefPan
20 Wah-Tremolo WahTrm 43 Tremolo-Distortion TrmDst
21 Wah-AutoPan WahPan 44 Tremolo-Chorus TrmCho
22 Compressor-Wah CmpWah 45 Tremolo-Flanger TrmFln
23 Compressor-Distortion CmpDst 46 Tremolo-Reflection TrmRef
• For details about parameters that can be configured with each DSP type, refer to the sections shown in the table below.
For information about this DSP type: Go here:
Single type (Type numbers 01 through 14) Single Type DSP Parameters (page E-157)
Dual type (Type numbers 15 through 46) Dual Type DSP Parameters (page E-159)
E-156
Reference
DSP Parameter List 04: Enhancer

Phase shifts low-range sounds and high-range sounds of the
■ Single Type DSP Parameters input signal to enhance the signal’s profile.
Parameters and Value Ranges:
01: Wah 1 :Low Frequency (0 to 127)
This is a “wah” effect that can automatically affect the Adjusts the low range enhancer frequency.
frequency using an LFO. 2 :Low Phase (0 to 127)
Parameters and Value Ranges: Adjusts the phase shift amount of the low-range enhancer.
1 :Resonance (0 to 127) 3 :High Frequency (0 to 127)
Adjusts the strength of resonance. Adjusts the high range enhancer frequency.
2 :Manual (0 to 127) 4 :High Phase (0 to 127)
Adjusts the wah filter reference frequency. Adjusts the phase shift amount of the high-range
3 :LFO Rate (0 to 127) enhancer.
Adjusts the LFO rate.
4 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)
05: Auto Pan
Adjusts the LFO depth. Performs continual left-right panning of the input signal using
5 :LFO Waveform (off, sin, tri, random) an LFO.
Selects the LFO waveform. Parameters and Value Ranges:
1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)
02: Compressor Adjusts the panning rate.
Compresses the input signal, which can have the effect of 2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)
Adjusts the panning depth.
suppressing level variation and make it possible to sustain
dampened sounds longer. 3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri)
Parameters and Value Ranges: Selects the LFO waveform.
1 :Attack (0 to 127)
Adjusts the attack amount of the input signal. A smaller 06: Tremolo
value causes prompt compressor operation, which Adjusts the volume of the input signal using an LFO.
suppresses the attack of the input signal. A larger values Parameters and Value Ranges:
delays compressor operation, which causes the attack of 1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)
the input signal to be output as-is. Adjusts the tremolo rate.
2 :Release (0 to 127) 2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)
Adjusts the time from the point the input signal drops Adjusts the tremolo depth.
below a certain level until the compression operation is
3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri)
stopped. When an attack feeling is desired (no
Selects the LFO waveform.
compression at the onset of sound), set this parameter to
as low a value as possible. To have compression applied
at all times, set a high value. 07: Phaser
3 :Level (0 to 127) Produces a distinctive pulsating, broad sound by using an
Adjusts the output level. LFO to change the phase of the input signal and then mixes it
4 :Threshold (0 to 127) with the original input signal.
Adjusts the volume level at which the compression Parameters and Value Ranges:
operation starts. 1 :Resonance (0 to 127)
Adjusts the strength of the resonance.
03: Distortion 2 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)
Digital distortion that applies an overtone to the input signal Adjusts the LFO rate.
and distorts it. 3 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)
Parameters and Value Ranges: Adjusts the LFO depth.
1 :Gain (0 to 127) 4 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri, random)
Adjusts the input signal gain. Selects the LFO waveform.
2 :Level (0 to 127)
Adjusts the output level.
E-157
Reference
08: Flanger 11: Reflection

Applies wildly pulsating and metallic reverberation to sounds. An effector that extracts early reflections from reverb. Applies
LFO waveform is selectable. acoustic presence to sounds.
Parameters and Value Ranges: Parameters and Value Ranges:
1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127) 1 :Type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8)
Adjusts the LFO rate. Selects from among the eight available reflection patterns.
2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127) 2 :Feedback (0 to 127)
Adjusts the LFO depth. Adjusts the repeat of the reflected sound.
3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri, random)
Selects the LFO waveform. 12: Rotary
4 :Feedback (0 to 127) This is a rotary speaker simulator.
Adjusts the strength of feedback. Parameters and Value Ranges:
1 :Overdrive Gain (0, 1, 2, 3)
09: Chorus Adjusts overdrive gain.
Gives sounds depth and breadth. Chorus type is selectable. 2 :Overdrive Level (0 to 127)
Parameters and Value Ranges: Adjusts the overdrive output level.
1 :LFO Rate (0 to 127) 3 :Speed (Slow, Fast)
Adjusts the LFO rate. Switches the speed mode between fast and slow.
2 :LFO Depth (0 to 127) 4 :Brake (Rotate, Stop)
Adjusts the LFO depth. Stops speaker rotation.
3 :LFO Waveform (sin, tri) 5 :Fall Acceleration (0 to 127)
Selects the LFO waveform. Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched
4 :Feedback (0 to 127) from fast to slow.
Adjusts the strength of feedback 6 :Rise Acceleration (0 to 127)
5 :Type (mono, stereo, tri) Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is switched
Selects the chorus type. from slow to fast.
7 :Slow Rate (0 to 127)
10: Delay Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the slow speed
mode.
Delays the input signal and feeds it back to create a repeating
8 :Fast Rate (0 to 127)
effect and give sounds more breadth.
Adjusts the speaker rotation speed in the fast speed
Parameters and Value Ranges:
mode.
1 :Delay Time (0 to 127)
Adjusts the delay time.
13: Ring Modulator
2 :Feedback (0 to 127)
Adjusts the repeat of the delay. Multiplies the input signal with an internal oscillator signal to
create a metallic sound.
3 :Ratio Lch (0 to 127)
Adjusts the delay time of the left channel. This value is a Parameters and Value Ranges:
ratio of the value specified for Delay Time. 1 :OSC Frequency (0 to 127)
Sets the reference frequency of the internal oscillator.
4 :Ratio Rch (0 to 127)
Adjusts the delay time of the right channel. This value is a 2 :LFO Rate (0 to 127)
ratio of the value specified for Delay Time. Adjusts the LFO rate.
5 :Wet Level (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) 3 :LFO Depth (0 to 127)
Adjusts the level of the delay sound. Adjusts the LFO depth.
6 :Type (1, 2) 4 :Type (1, 2, 3)
Selects the delay type. 1 :Outputs the ring modulated signal only.
1 :Delay repeat determined by Delay Time. 2 :Outputs the ring modulated signal and the input signal.
2 :Delay repeat determined by Delay Time and Ratio L/R. 3 :Outputs a signal with a chorus effect applied to 2 (ring
modulated signal and input signal).
Important!
When adjusting the delay time and type, certain settings can
result in a switching sound in the delay.
E-158
Reference
14: Lo-Fi ■ Dual Type DSP Parameters

Applies various types of noise to the input signal to reproduce Dual type DSPs are configured by combining two different
a retro Lo-Fi sound. single type DSPs. Use the procedure below to determine what
Includes wow and flutter for rotational fluctuation like that in parameters that can be configured for each dual type DSP,
tapes and records, a Noise 1 generator that generates and the operation, and setting ranges of dual type DSPs.
continual FM radio type, and a Noise 2 generator that Example: Type number 29: Distortion-Wah
generates record play types scratch noise. 1. The DSP type name has two parts: a left side part and a
Parameters and Value Ranges: right side part.
1 :Wow and Flutter Rate (0 to 127) Distortion-Wah 3 “Distortion” and “Wah”
Adjusts the wow and flutter rate. 2. Find out what parameters you can configure by looking up
2 :Wow and Flutter Depth (0 to 127) the left side part of a dual type DSP in the “Type Name”
Adjusts the wow and flutter depth. column of the table below.
3 :Noise1 Level (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Type Name Configurable Parameters
Adjusts the level of Noise Generator 1.
4 :Noise2 Level (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Wah LFO Waveform
Adjusts the level of Noise Generator 2. LFO Rate
5 :Noise2 Density (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) LFO Depth
Adjusts the frequency of Noise Generator 2. Distortion Gain
6 :Bit (0, 1, 2, 3) Level
Distorts the sound. A larger number produces greater
distortion. Chorus LFO Waveform
LFO Rate
Important! LFO Depth
Raising the noise level while a note is not sounding will cause
noise to sound, even if there is no input signal. Flanger LFO Waveform
LFO Rate
LFO Depth
Reflection Feedback
Compressor Threshold
Level
Auto Pan LFO Waveform
LFO Rate
LFO Depth
Tremolo LFO Waveform
LFO Rate
LFO Depth
3. Find the same type names in the table under “Single Type
DSP Parameters” on pages E-157 through E-159, and note
the operation and setting ranges of the items that are the
same as those shown in the “Configurable Parameters”
column of the above table.
• In our “Distortion-Wah” example, the left side part of the
name is “Distortion” so we can see in the above table
that “Gain” and “Level” parameters can be configured.
You can find out about the operations and setting ranges
of “Gain” and “Level” by referring to “03: Distortion” on
page E-157.
4. Next, repeat steps 2 and 3 above for the right side part of
the dual type DSP parameter name.
• The parameter numbers that appear on the parameter
setting screen start from 1, and the number is
incremented for each successive parameter.
The parameter numbers of our “Distortion-Wah” example
would be as shown below.
1 :Gain
2 :Level
3 :LFO Waveform
4 :LFO Rate
5 :LFO Depth
E-159
Reference
Fingering Guide Fingered 3, Full Range Chords

In addition to the chords that can be fingered with Fingered 1
Fingered 1, Fingered 2 Chords and Fingered 2, the following chords also are recognized.
# b b #
C D E F G A B B Cm Dm Fm
C
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
C C C C C C C C C C C
b b b
Gm ! Am Bm Ddim A7 F7 Fm7 Gm7 A add9
Cm
! ! ! ! ! ! !
C C C C C C C C C
Cdim
• With Fingered 3, the lowest note fingered is interpreted as
Caug *3 the base note. Inverted forms are not supported.
• With Full Range Chord, when the lowest note fingered is a
Csus4 *3 certain distance from the neighboring note, the chord is
interpreted as a fraction chord.
• Unlike Fingered 1, 2, and 3, Full Range Chord requires
Csus2 *3 pressing of at least three keys to form a chord.
C7 Supported Input Characters

Cm7 *3
CM7
Cm7b5 *3
C7b5 *3
C7sus4
Cadd9
Cmadd9
CmM7
Cdim7 *3
C69 *3
C6 *1 *3
Cm6 *2 *3
*1 With Fingered 2, interpreted as Am7.

*2 With Fingered 2, interpreted as Am7b5.
*3 Inverted form not supported in some cases.
E-160
Reference
Assigning a MIDI Channel to Each Part

The following shows the relationship between MIDI IN and MIDI OUT channels and each part.
This MIDI Channel This MIDI Channel

Part name Part name
part: IN OUT part: IN OUT
A01 -- 01* Upper1 B01 01 01 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 01
A02 -- 02 Upper2 B02 02 02 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 02
A03 -- 03 Lower B03 03 03 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 03
A04 -- 04 Harmo. B04 04 04 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 04
A05 -- 05 System Upper1 B05 05 05 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 05
A06 -- 06 System Upper2 B06 06 06 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 06
A07 -- 07 System Lower B07 07 07 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 07
A08 -- -- Metronome B08 08 08 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 08
A09 -- 09 Perc. B09 09 09 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 09
A10 -- 10 Drum B10 10 10 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 10
A11 -- 11 Bass B11 11 11 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 11
A12 -- 12 Chord1 B12 12 12 SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 12
* The A01 part MIDI OUT channel depends on the keyboard channel setting. For details, see “KeyboardCh (Keyboard Channel)”
(page E-133).
• For details about parts, see “How Parts are Organized” (page E-36).
E-161
Reference
Parameter List
Refer to this column in
To check this setting item:
the table below:
Setting items that are always saved when power is turned off 1
Setting items stored in registration memory (page E-66) 2
When “on” is selected for the “AutoResume (Auto Resume)” setting (page E-134), setting items
that are restored to those in effect the last time power was turned off 3
Items that are stored as “Default (Default Settings)” (page E-134)
Settings items initialized by the “To initialize all mixer parameters” operation (page E-40) 4
Setting items initialized when “Parameter” (parameter settings only) is selected by “Initialize
(Initialize)” (page E-135) 5
Setting Item 1 2 3 4 5 Setting Item 1 2 3 4 5

User Memory Items Reverb (On, Off, Type) O O O
User rhythms, user tones, user drawbar Chorus Type O O O
O
organ tones, user DSPs, user presets DSP Type O O O
Registration O Tempo O*2 O O
Function Menu Item Synchro Standby O*2 O O
Tuning O O Scale Preset Number O O
Equalizer O O Scale Root O O
Touch Response O O O Scale Fine Tuning O*4 O O
Touch Off Velocity O O O Accompaniment Scale O*4 O O O
Pedal Assign O O O Accompaniment Part On/Off O*2 O
Bend Range*1 O O Mode (Rhythm/Card) Selection Status O
Arpeggiator Hold O O O Card Song number O
Arpeggiator Speed O O O Left-hand Part Select O
Arpeggiator Part O O O Right-hand Part Select O
Registration Filter Registration Bank Number O O
O
(Accompaniment/Scale)
Rhythm Category Number O O
Song Pre-count Sound O O
Tone Category Number O O
Song Repeat Play O O
Music Preset Category Number O
Auto Accompaniment Volume O*2 O O
Mixer Settings for Part A01 through A04
Song Volume O O
Part On/Off*1 O O O
Metronome Volume O O O
Part Volume*1 O O O O
Audio Volume O O
Part Pan*1 O O O O
Keyboard Channel O O
Part Coarse Tuning*1 O O O O
Local Control O
Part Fine Tuning*1 O O O O
Accompaniment MIDI Out O
Part Bend Range*1 O O O O
Speaker ON/OFF O O
Part DSP Line On/Off*1 O O O O
LCD Contrast O
Part Reverb Send*1 O O O O
Auto Power Off O O
Part Chorus Send*1 O O O O
Auto Resume O
Part Scale Enable*1 O O O
Other Items
Mixer Settings for Master, DSP and MIC/
Tone Number*1 O O O O INST, and for Parts A05 through A16, and O
Rhythm Number O*2 O O Parts B01 through B16
Music Preset Number O
Transpose O O O *1 Configured for each of the following parts: A01 through
Split On/Off O O O A04 (UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER, Auto Harmonize).
Split Point O O O *2 Not recalled when “on” is selected for “RegFltAcmp” (page
Layer On/Off O O O E-132).
Octave Shift*3 O O O *3 Configured for each of the following parts: A01 through
Accompaniment On/Off O*2 O O A03 (UPPER 1, UPPER 2, LOWER).
Chord Fingering Mode O*2 O O *4 Not recalled when “on” is selected for “RegFltScal” (page
Auto Harmonize On/Off/Type O O O E-132).
Metronome Beat O O
DSP Disable O
E-162
Chord Example List
Root
CTK7200_e. oo
# #
Chord C C /(Db) D (D#)/Eb E F F /(Gb) G (G#)/Ab A (A#)/Bb B
Type
1
M
ページ
dim
aug
sus4
sus2
m7
M7
２０１４年３月７日　金曜日　午後３時４分
m7b5
7b5
7sus4
add9
madd9
mM7
dim7
69
m6
• Since the chord input range is limited, this model may not support some of the chords shown above.
Reference
E-163
• Cut this page along the dashed line so you can have it on hand as you read the contents of the manual.
CTK-7200 / WK-7600
Dial
L-3 L-4 L-5 R-1 R-2 R-3 R-4 R-5 R-6
C-1
L-1
C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5
R-7 R-8 R-9 R-10 R-11 R-12
L-6 L-7 L-8
L-2
L-9 L-10 L-11 R-13 R-14 R-15 R-17 R-16
C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9

L-12 L-13 L-14 L-15 L-16 L-17 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 R-18 R-19 R-20
■ Left
1 4 ページ
CTK7200_e. oo
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-10 D-11 D-12
CTK7200_e. oo
1
ページ
Models: CTK-7200/WK-7600 Version : 1.0
MIDI Implementation Chart

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16
Channel Changed 1 - 16 1 - 16
Default Mode 3 Mode 3

Mode Messages X X
Altered
Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number True voice 0 - 127 *1
Note ON O 9nH v = 1 - 127 O 9nH v = 1 - 127

Velocity
Note OFF X 9nH v = 0 X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =** **: no relation
After Key’s X X
Touch Ch’s X O
Pitch Bender O O
0, 32 O O (MSB only) Bank select

1 O O Modulation
6, 38 O *2 O *2 Data entry LSB, MSB
7 O O Volume
10 O O Pan
Control 11 X O Expression
Change 16 - 19 O *2 O *2
64 O *3 O Hold 1
66 O *3 O Sostenuto
67 O *3 O Soft pedal
70 - 90 O *2 O *2
91 O O Reverb send
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Version : 1.0
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
O : Yes
X : No
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Data entry LSB, MSB

Remarks
FCC WARNING
NRPN LSB, MSB

RPN LSB, MSB
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Chorus send
Reverb send
Bank select
Expression
Modulation
Soft pedal
Sostenuto
Volume
Hold 1
Pan
Declaration of Conformity
*2: For details, see MIDI Implementation at http://world.casio.com/.

Model Number: CTK-7200/WK-7600
Trade Name: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
O (MSB only)
Responsible party: CASIO AMERICA, INC.
X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =**

Address: 570 MT. PLEASANT AVENUE, DOVER, NEW JERSEY 07801
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
Telephone number: 973-361-5400
Recognized
0 - 127 *1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules, Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
O 0 - 127
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *2
Mode 3
0 - 127
1 - 16
1 - 16
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
interference that may cause undesired operation.
*3: In accordance with pedal effect setting.
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
Transmitted
*1: Depends on tone.

X 9nH v = 0
O 0 - 127
O *2
O *2
O *2
O *3
O *3
O *3
O *2
O *2
O *2
Mode 3
0 - 127
1 - 16
1 - 16
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
0, 32
1
6, 38
7
10
11
16 - 19
64
66
67
70 - 90
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
: Reset all controller

: Local ON/OFF
: Commands
: All notes OFF

Models: CTK-7200/WK-7600
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Messages
: Active Sense
True voice
Note OFF
: All sound off
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

: Song Pos
Changed
: Song Sel
Note ON
Altered
Default
Default
:True #
Key’s
: Clock
Ch’s
: Tune
: Reset
Function
System Exclusive
Pitch Bender
Messages
Real Time
Common
Remarks
Program
Channel
Velocity
Number
Change
Change
System
System
Control
Touch
Basic
Mode
After
Note
Aux
CTK- 7200 E
WK-7600
USER’S GUIDE
Please keep all information for future reference.
This recycle mark indicates that the packaging conforms to
the environmental protection legislation in Germany. Safety Precautions
Before trying to use the keyboard, be sure to read the
separate “Safety Precautions”.
K MA1403-B Printed in China

CTK7200/WK7600E1B
CTK7200/WK7600E1B

Casio WK-7600 USER MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Casio WK-7600 USER MANUAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Casio WK-7600 USER MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CTK7200_e_Cover1-4.

K MA1403-B Printed in China

Data entry LSB, MSB

NRPN LSB, MSB

*2: For details, see MIDI Implementation at http://world.casio.com/.

X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =**

*3: In accordance with pedal effect setting.

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

*1: Depends on tone.

: Reset all controller

: All notes OFF

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

: All sound off

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

This mark applies in EU countries only.

Using the Reference................................. E-148

Using the Function Menu....... E-130

Using a Memory Card............. E-136

Connecting to a Computer .... E-145

L-1 - L-17 C-1 - C-17

• In this manual, the term “Digital Keyboard” refers to the CTK-7200/WK-7600.

L-1 POWER button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ☞13 TONE buttons

6 Tempo, measure, beat area

Currently Selected Item Indication

4 Registration bank area

C-4 (SONG C-4 (SONG SEQUENCER) or

Song sequencer mode

• After entering any mode besides the rhythm mode and

Returning the Digital Keyboard to

Getting Ready to Play

Specified AC Adaptor: AD-A12150LW

T-10 (DC 12V) jack Household power outlet

• Be sure to comply with the separate “Safety

• The shape of the power cord plug and household

• Never insert metal, pencils, or any other objects into

Getting Ready to Play

Using Batteries ■ Low Battery Indication

2. Load six D-size batteries into the battery

3. Insert the tabs of the battery cover into the

• Whenever connecting a device to the Digital Keyboard,

Outputting Keyboard Notes to a Musical

Outputting Input from an External Output of External Device Input that is

• Whenever connecting something to the Digital

Bundled and Optional

• You can get information about accessories that are sold

Selecting and Playing a Tone

L-14 L-16 R-19

To turn on Digital Keyboard power

Selecting and Playing a Tone

■ To disable Auto Power Off

1. Refer to the separate “Appendix” to look up the

2. Check to make sure that the @ and A

• The R-11 ([K] USER TONES) button selects the user

2. To stop demo tune playback, press the L-16

Selecting and Playing a Tone

• Two layered tones across the entire keyboard (page

Selecting and Playing a Tone

To layer two tones To split the keyboard between two tones

7. To cancel keyboard split, press the R-19 (SPLIT)

Selecting and Playing a Tone

Intro 1 Normal Variation Ending 4